Create Subversion repository

git-svn-id: http://svn.code.sf.net/p/netpbm/code/trunk@1 9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8

1 files changed, 12115 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/vms/NetPBM.TeX b/vms/NetPBM.TeX
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..86a9abc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/vms/NetPBM.TeX
@@ -0,0 +1,12115 @@
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex (version 1.04, July 15, 1991)
+% on Thu Dec 12 09:12:27 1991
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+
+\documentstyle[troffman,twoside]{article}
+\begin{document}
+%
+% input file: pbmplus.1
+%
+\phead{PBMPLUS}{1L}{13 October 1993}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmplus - enhanced portable bitmap toolkit
+
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+The {\it pbmplus} toolkit allows conversions between image files of
+different format.  By means of using common intermediate formats, only
+$2 \times N$ conversion filters are required to support $N$ distinct formats,
+instead of the $N^2$ which would be required to convert directly between
+any one format and any other.  The package also includes simple tools for
+manipulating portable bitmaps.
+
+The package consists of four upwardly compatible sections:
+\begin{TPlist}{pbm}
+\item[{pbm}]
+Supports monochrome bitmaps (1 bit per pixel).
+\item[{pgm}]
+Supports grayscale images.  Reads either {\it pbm} or {\it pgm} formats
+and writes {\it pgm} format.
+\item[{ppm}]
+Supports full-color images.  Reads either {\it pbm}, {\it pgm}, or {\it
+ppm} formats, writes {\it ppm} format.
+\item[{pnm}]
+Supports content-independent manipulations on any of the three formats
+listed above, as well as external formats having multiple types.  Reads
+either {\it pbm}, {\it pgm}, or {\it ppm} formats, and generally writes
+the same type as it read (whenever a {\it pnm} tool makes an exception
+and ``promotes'' a file to a higher format, it informs the user).
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{DESCRIPTION OF CONTENTS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\it cmuwmtopbm}}
+\item[{{\it atktopbm}}]
+convert Andrew Toolkit raster object to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it brushtopbm}}]
+convert Xerox doodle brushes to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it cmuwmtopbm}}]
+convert CMU window manager format to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it g3topbm}}]
+convert Group 3 FAX to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it icontopbm}}]
+convert Sun icon to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it gemtopbm}}]
+convert GEM .img format to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it macptopbm}}]
+convert MacPaint to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it mgrtopbm}}]
+convert MGR format to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it pbmmerge}}]
+merge wrapper routine
+\item[{{\it pbmto10x}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Gemini 10x printer graphics
+\item[{{\it pbmtoascii}}]
+convert portable bitmap to ASCII graphic form
+\item[{{\it pbmtoatk}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Andrew Toolkit raster object
+\item[{{\it pbmtobbnbg}}]
+convert portable bitmap to BBN BitGraph graphics
+\item[{{\it pbmtocmuwm}}]
+convert portable bitmap to CMU window manager format
+\item[{{\it pbmtoepson}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Epson printer graphics
+\item[{{\it pbmtog3}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Group 3 FAX
+\item[{{\it pbmtogem}}]
+convert portable bitmap into GEM .img file
+\item[{{\it pbmtogo}}]
+convert portable bitmap to GraphOn graphics
+\item[{{\it pbmtoicon}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Sun icon
+\item[{{\it pbmtolj}}]
+convert portable bitmap to HP LaserJet graphics
+\item[{{\it pbmtomacp}}]
+convert portable bitmap to MacPaint
+\item[{{\it pbmtomgr}}]
+convert portable bitmap to MGR format
+\item[{{\it pbmtopi3}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Atari Degas .pi3
+\item[{{\it pbmtoplot}}]
+convert portable bitmap into Unix plot(5) file
+\item[{{\it pbmtoptx}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Printronix graphics
+\item[{{\it pbmtoxbm}}]
+convert portable bitmap to X11 bitmap
+\item[{{\it pbmtox10bm}}]
+convert portable bitmap to X10 bitmap
+\item[{{\it pbmtoybm}}]
+convert portable bitmap into Bennet Yee ``face'' file
+\item[{{\it pbmtozinc}}]
+convert portable bitmap to Zinc Interface Library icon
+\item[{{\it pbmlife}}]
+apply Conway's rules of Life to a portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it pbmmake}}]
+create a blank bitmap of a specified size and color
+\item[{{\it pbmmask}}]
+create a mask bitmap from a regular bitmap
+\item[{{\it pbmreduce}}]
+reduce a portable bitmap N times, using Floyd-Steinberg
+\item[{{\it pbmtext}}]
+render text into a bitmap
+\item[{{\it pbmupc}}]
+create a Universal Product Code bitmap
+\item[{{\it pi3topbm}}]
+convert Atari Degas .pi3 to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it xbmtopbm}}]
+convert X10 or X11 bitmap to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it ybmtopbm}}]
+convert Bennet Yee ``face'' file into portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it asciitopgm}}]
+convert ASCII graphics into a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it fstopgm}}]
+convert Usenix FaceSaver$^{\rm tm}$ format to portable graymap
+\item[{{\it hipstopgm}}]
+convert HIPS format to portable graymap
+\item[{{\it lispmtopgm}}]
+convert a Lisp Machine bitmap file into pgm format
+\item[{{\it pgmbentley}}]
+Bentleyize a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it pgmcrater}}]
+create cratered terrain by fractal forgery
+\item[{{\it pgmedge}}]
+edge-detect a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it pgmenhance}}]
+edge-enhance a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it pgmhist}}]
+print a histogram of the values in a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it pgmkernel}}]
+generate a convolution kernel
+\item[{{\it pgmmerge}}]
+merge wrapper routine
+\item[{{\it pgmnoise}}]
+create a graymap made up of white noise
+\item[{{\it pgmnorm}}]
+normalize contrast in a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it pgmoil}}]
+turn a portable graymap into an oil painting
+\item[{{\it pgmramp}}]
+generate a grayscale ramp
+\item[{{\it pgmtexture}}]
+calculate textural features on a portable graymap
+\item[{{\it pgmtofits}}]
+convert portable graymap to FITS format
+\item[{{\it pgmtofs}}]
+convert portable graymap to Usenix FaceSaver$^{\rm tm}$ format
+\item[{{\it pgmtolispm}}]
+convert a portable graymap into Lisp Machine format
+\item[{{\it pgmtopbm}}]
+convert portable graymap to portable bitmap
+\item[{{\it psidtopgm}}]
+convert PostScript ``image'' data to portable graymap
+\item[{{\it rawtopgm}}]
+convert raw grayscale bytes to portable graymap
+\item[{{\it giftoppm}}]
+convert GIF to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it gouldtoppm}}]
+convert Gould scanner file to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it ilbmtoppm}}]
+convert IFF ILBM to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it imgtoppm}}]
+convert Img-whatnot to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it mtvtoppm}}]
+convert MTV ray-tracer output to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it pcxtoppm}}]
+convert PC Paintbrush format to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it pgmtoppm}}]
+colorize a portable graymap into a portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it pi1toppm}}]
+convert Atari Degas .pi1 to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it picttoppm}}]
+convert Macintosh PICT to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it pjtoppm}}]
+convert HP PaintJet file to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it ppmchange}}]
+change all pixels of one color to another in a portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it ppmdim}}]
+dim a portable pixmap down to total blackness
+\item[{{\it ppmdist}}]
+simplistic grayscale assignment for machine generated, color images
+\item[{{\it ppmdither}}]
+ordered dither for color images
+\item[{{\it ppmflash}}]
+brighten a picture up to complete white-out
+\item[{{\it ppmforge}}]
+fractal forgeries of clouds, planets, and starry skies
+\item[{{\it ppmhist}}]
+print a histogram of a portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it ppmmake}}]
+create a pixmap of a specified size and color
+\item[{{\it ppmmerge}}]
+merge wrapper routine
+\item[{{\it ppmmix}}]
+blend together two portable pixmaps
+\item[{{\it ppmpat}}]
+create a pretty pixmap
+\item[{{\it ppmquant}}]
+quantize colors down to a specified number
+\item[{{\it ppmquantall}}]
+script to run ppmquant on a set of pixmaps
+\item[{{\it ppmrelief}}]
+run a Laplacian Relief filter on a portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it ppmshift}}]
+shift lines of a portable pixmap left or right by a random amount
+\item[{{\it ppmspread}}]
+displace a portable pixmap's pixels by a random amount
+\item[{{\it ppmtoacad}}]
+convert portable pixmap to AutoCAD database or slide
+\item[{{\it ppmtoicr}}]
+convert portable pixmap to NCSA ICR graphics
+\item[{{\it ppmtoilbm}}]
+convert portable pixmap to IFF ILBM
+\item[{{\it ppmtomitsu}}]
+convert a portable pixmap to a Mitsubishi S340-10 file
+\item[{{\it ppmtopcx}}]
+convert portable pixmap to PC Paintbrush format
+\item[{{\it ppmtopgm}}]
+convert portable pixmap to portable graymap
+\item[{{\it ppmtopi1}}]
+convert portable pixmap to Atari Degas .pi1
+\item[{{\it ppmtopict}}]
+convert portable pixmap to Macintosh PICT
+\item[{{\it ppmtopj}}]
+convert portable pixmap to HP PaintJet file
+\item[{{\it ppmtopuzz}}]
+convert portable pixmap to X11 ``puzzle'' file
+\item[{{\it ppmtorgb3}}]
+separate a portable pixmap into three portable graymaps
+\item[{{\it ppmtosixel}}]
+convert portable pixmap to DEC sixel format
+\item[{{\it ppmtotga}}]
+convert portable pixmap to TrueVision Targa file
+\item[{{\it ppmtouil}}]
+convert portable pixmap to Motif UIL icon file
+\item[{{\it ppmtoxpm}}]
+convert portable pixmap to XPM format
+\item[{{\it ppmtoyuv}}]
+convert portable pixmap to Abekas YUV format
+\item[{{\it qrttoppm}}]
+convert QRT ray-tracer output to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it rawtoppm}}]
+convert raw RGB bytes to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it rgb3toppm}}]
+combine three portable graymaps into one portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it sldtoppm}}]
+convert an AutoCAD slide file into a portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it spctoppm}}]
+convert Atari compressed Spectrum to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it sputoppm}}]
+convert Atari uncompressed Spectrum to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it tgatoppm}}]
+convert TrueVision Targa file to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it ximtoppm}}]
+convert Xim to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it xvminitoppm}}]
+convert a XV ``thumbnail'' picture to PPM
+\item[{{\it xpmtoppm}}]
+convert XPM format to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it yuvtoppm}}]
+convert Abekas YUV format to portable pixmap
+\item[{{\it anytopnm}}]
+script to attempt to convert any format to P?M
+\item[{{\it pnmalias}}]
+antialias a portable anyumap.
+\item[{{\it pnmarith}}]
+perform arithmetic on two portable anymaps
+\item[{{\it pnmcat}}]
+concatenate portable anymaps
+\item[{{\it pnmconvol}}]
+general MxN convolution on a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmcrop}}]
+crop all like-colored borders off a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmcut}}]
+select a rectangular region from a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmdepth}}]
+change the maxval in a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmenlarge}}]
+enlarge a portable anymap N times
+\item[{{\it pnmfile}}]
+describe a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmflip}}]
+perform one or more flip operations on a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmgamma}}]
+perform gamma correction on a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmindex}}]
+script to build a visual index of a bunch of anymaps
+\item[{{\it pnminvert}}]
+invert a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmmargin}}]
+script to add a margin to a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmmerge}}]
+merge wrapper routine
+\item[{{\it pnmnoraw}}]
+force a portable anymap into ASCII format
+\item[{{\it pnmpaste}}]
+paste a rectangle into a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmrotate}}]
+rotate a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmscale}}]
+scale a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmshear}}]
+shear a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmsmooth}}]
+script that uses pnmconvol to smooth a anymap
+\item[{{\it pnmtile}}]
+replicate a portable anymap into a specified size
+\item[{{\it pnmtofits}}]
+convert a portable anymap into FITS format
+\item[{{\it pnmtogif}}]
+convert portable anymap to GIF
+\item[{{\it pnmtops}}]
+convert portable anymap to PostScript
+\item[{{\it pnmtorast}}]
+convert portable anymap to Sun raster file
+\item[{{\it pnmtotiff}}]
+convert portable anymap to TIFF file
+\item[{{\it pnmtoxwd}}]
+convert portable anymap to X11 window dump
+\item[{{\it fitstopnm}}]
+fitstopnm - convert a FITS file into a portable anymap
+\item[{{\it pstopnm}}]
+script to convert PS to portable anymap with GhostScript
+\item[{{\it rasttopnm}}]
+convert Sun raster file to portable anymap
+\item[{{\it tifftopnm}}]
+convert TIFF file to portable anymap
+\item[{{\it xwdtopnm}}]
+convert X10 or X11 window dump to portable anymap
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+There are a number of related image-manipulation tools:
+\begin{TPlist}{{\it Fuzzy Pixmap Manipulation}}
+\item[{{\it IM Raster Toolkit}}]
+A portable and efficient format toolkit.  The format supports pixels of
+arbitrary channels, components, and bit precisions, while allowing
+compression and machine byte-order independence.  Support for image
+manipulation, digital halftoning, and format conversion.  Previously
+distributed on tape c/o the University of Waterloo (an {\it ftp}
+version is to appear later).  Author: Alan Paeth
+(awpaeth@watcgl.uwaterloo.ca).
+\item[{{\it Utah RLE Toolkit}}]
+Conversion and manipulation package, similar to {\it pbmplus}.  Available
+via {\it ftp} as {\it cs.utah.edu: pub/toolkit-2.0.tar.Z} and {\it
+ucsd.edu: graphics\-/utah-raster-toolkit.\-tar.Z}.
+\item[{{\it Fuzzy Pixmap Manipulation}}]
+Conversion and manipulation package, similar to {\it pbmplus}.  Version
+1.0 available via {\it ftp} as {\it
+nl.cs.cmu.edu: /usr/mlm/ftp/fbm.tar.Z}, {\it
+uunet.uu.net: pub/fbm.tar.Z}, and {\it ucsd.edu: graphics/fbm.tar.Z}.
+Author: Michael Mauldin (mlm@nl.cs.cmu.edu).
+\item[{{\it Img Software Set}}]
+Reads and writes its own image format, displaying results on an X11
+screen, and does some image manipulations.  Version 1.3 is available via
+{\it ftp} as {\it ftp.x.org: contrib/img\_1.3.tar.Z}, and {\it
+venera.isi.edu: pub/img\_1.3.tar.Z}, along with a large collection of
+color images.  Author: Paul Raveling (raveling@venera.isi.edu).
+\item[{{\it Xim}}]
+Reads and writes its own image format, displays on an X11 screen, and
+does some image manipulations.  Available in your nearest X11R4 source
+tree as {\it contrib/clients/xim}.  A more recent version is available
+via ftp from {\it video.mit.edu}.  It uses X11R4 and the OSF/Motif
+toolkit to provide basic interactive image manipulation and reads/writes
+GIF, xwd, xbm, tiff, rle, xim, and other formats.  Author: Philip R.
+Thompson.
+\item[{{\it xloadimage}}]
+Reads in images in various formats and displays them on an X11 screen.
+Available via {\it ftp} as {\it
+ftp.x.org: contrib/xloadimage$\ast$}, and in your nearest {\it
+comp.sources.\-x} archive.  Author: Jim Frost (madd@std.\-com).
+\item[{{\it TIFF\ Software}}]
+Nice portable library for reading and writing TIFF files, plus a few
+tools for manipulating them and reading other formats.  Available via
+{\it ftp} as {\it sgi.com: graphics/tiff/$\ast$.tar.Z} or {\it
+uunet.uu.net: graphics/tiff.tar.Z}.  Author: Sam Leffler
+(sam@sgi.com).
+\item[{{\it ALV}}]
+A Sun-specific image toolkit.  Version 2.0.6 posted to {\it
+comp.sources.\-sun} on 11 December 1989.  Also available via email to {\it
+alv-users-request @cs.bris.ac.uk}.
+\item[{{\it popi}}]
+An image manipulation language.  Version 2.1 posted to {\it
+comp.\-sources.\-misc} on 12 December 1989.
+\item[{{\it ImageMagick,}}]
+X11 package for display and interactive manipulation of images.  Uses its
+own format (MIFF), and includes some converters.  Available via {\it
+ftp} as {\it ftp.x.org: contrib/ImageMagick.$\ast$.tar.Z}.
+\item[{{\it Khoros}}]
+A huge (\~{}100 meg) graphical development environment based on X11R4.
+Components include a visual programming language, code generators for
+extending the visual language and adding new application packages to the
+system, an interactive user interface editor, an interactive image
+display package, an extensive library of image and signal processing
+routines, and 2D/3D plotting packages.  Available via {\it ftp} as
+{\it pprg.unm.edu: pub/khoros/$\ast$}.
+\item[{JPEG package}]
+JPEG is a a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale
+images of ``real-world'' scenes; this experimental package includes
+programs to compress gif and ppm format files to JPEG format ({\it
+cjpeg(1L)),} and to decompress them ({\it djpeg(1L)).} Available by {\it
+ftp} as {\it uunet.uu.net: graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v4.tar.Z}.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+libpbm(3), libpgm(3), libpnm(3), libppm(3), pbm(5), pgm(5), pnm(5),
+ppm(5), rasterfile(1)
+
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Distribution of 10 December 1991.  \copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
+Feedback and questions are welcome. Please send them to:
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{}}
+{\nofill
+        jef@netcom.com
+        jef@well.sf.ca.us
+        apple!well!jef
+\fill}
+\end{IPlist}
+
+When sending bug reports, always include the output from running any
+pbmplus program with the -version flag, including descriptions of the
+type of system you are on, the compiler you use, and whether you are
+using Makefiles or Imakefiles.
+
+When suggesting new formats or features, please include whatever
+documentation you have, and a uuencoded sample.  The response time will
+depend upon my schedule and the complexity of the task;  if you need it
+right away, or it is a complicated job, you might consider paying me.
+
+The Usenet newsgroup {\it alt.graphics.pixutils} is a forum for
+discussion of image conversion and editing packages.  Posting queries
+there may be better than mailing them to me, since it allows other people
+to help provide answers.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided ``as is'' without express or
+implied warranty.  Thus, you may do what you want with this software.
+Build it into your package, steal code from it, whatever.  Just be sure
+to let people know where it came from.
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Feb  4 14:35:11 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: asciitopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: asciitopgm.1
+%
+\phead{asciitopgm}{1}{26 December 1994}{}{}
+
+%.IX asciitopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+asciitopgm - convert ASCII graphics into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf asciitopgm}
+{\it [}{\rm -d}
+{\rm divisor}{\it ]}
+{\it height width}
+{\rm [}{\it asciifile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads ASCII data as input.
+Produces a portable graymap with pixel values which are an approximation
+of the ``brightness'' of the ASCII characters,
+assuming black-on-white printing.
+In other words, a capital M is very dark, a period is ver light,
+and a space is white.
+Input lines which are fewer than
+{\it width}
+characters are automatically padded with spaces.
+\par
+The
+{\it divisor}
+argument is a floating-point number by which the output pixels are
+divided; the default value is 1.0.
+This can be used to adjust the brightness of the graymap:
+for example, if the image is too dim, reduce the divisor.
+\par
+In keeping with (I believe) Fortran line-printer conventions,
+input lines beginning with a + (plus) character are assumed
+to ``overstrike'' the previous line, allowing a larger range of gray values.
+\par
+This tool contradicts the message in the
+{\it pbmtoascii}
+manual: ``Note that there is no asciitopbm tool - this
+transformation is one-way.''
+\shead{BUGS}
+The table of ASCII-to-grey values is subject to interpretation,
+and, of course, depends on the typeface intended for the input.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtoascii(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Wilson H. Bent. Jr. (whb@usc.edu)
+%
+% end of input file: asciitopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:54 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: atktopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: atktopbm.1
+%
+\phead{atktopbm}{1}{26 September 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX atktopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+atktopbm - convert Andrew Toolkit raster object to portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf atktopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it atkfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Andrew Toolkit raster object as input.
+%.IX "Andrew Toolkit raster object"
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtoatk(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Bill Janssen.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: atktopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:35 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: bioradtopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: bioradtopgm.1
+%
+\phead{bioradtopgm}{1}{28 June 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX bioradtopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+bioradtopgm - convert a Biorad confocal file into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf bioradtopgm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -image\#}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it imagedata}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Biorad confocal file as input.
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+If the resulting image is upside down, run it through
+{\bf pnmflip\ -tb .}
+%.IX pnmflip
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -image\#}}
+\item[{{\bf -image\#}}]
+A Biorad image file may contain more than one image. With this flag,
+you can specify which image to extract (only one at a time). The first
+image in the file has number zero. If no
+image number is supplied, only information about the image size and
+the number of images in the input is printed out. No output is produced.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+A Biorad image may be in word format. If PbmPlus is not compiled with the
+``BIGGRAYS'' flag, word files can not be converted. See the Makefile.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgm(5), pnmflip(1)
+\shead{AUTHORS}
+\copyright 1993 by Oliver Trepte (oliver@fysik4.kth.se).
+\nwl
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: bioradtopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:07 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: bmptoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: bmptoppm.1
+%
+\phead{bmptoppm}{1}{26 Oct 1992}{}{}
+
+%.IX bmptoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+bmptoppm -- convert a BMP file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf bmptoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it bmpfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Microsoft Windows or OS/2 BMP file as input.
+%.IX BMP
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtobmp(1),
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1992 by David W. Sanderson.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
+% its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
+% that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without
+% express or implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: bmptoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:54 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: brushtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: brushtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{brushtopbm}{1}{28 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX brushtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+brushtopbm - convert a doodle brush file into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf brushtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it brushfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Xerox doodle brush file as input.
+%.IX "Xerox doodle brush format"
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\par
+Note that there is currently no pbmtobrush tool.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: brushtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:55 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: cmuwmtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: cmuwmtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{cmuwmtopbm}{1}{15 April 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX cmuwmtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+cmuwmtopbm - convert a CMU window manager bitmap into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf cmuwmtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it cmuwmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a CMU window manager bitmap as input.
+%.IX "CMU window manager bitmap"
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtocmuwm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: cmuwmtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Feb  7 08:49:58 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: fitstopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: fitstopnm.1
+%
+\phead{fitstopnm}{1}{20 September 89}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+fitstopnm - convert a FITS file into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf fitstopnm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -image}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -noraw}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -scanmax}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -printmax}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -min}
+{\it f}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -max}
+{\it f}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it FITSfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a FITS file as input.
+%.IX FITS
+Produces a portable pixmap if the FITS file consists of 3 image planes
+(NAXIS = 3 and NAXIS3 = 3), a portable graymap if the FITS file
+consists of 2 image planes (NAXIS = 2), or whenever the 
+{\bf --image}
+flag is specified.
+The results may need to be flipped top for bottom; if so, just
+pipe the output through
+{\bf pnmflip -tb.}
+%.IX pnmflip
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The
+{\bf -image}
+option is for FITS files with three axes.
+The assumption is that the third axis is for multiple images,
+and this option lets you select which one you want.
+\par
+Flags 
+{\bf -min}
+and 
+{\bf -max}
+can be used to override the min and max values as read from the FITS
+header or the image data if no DATAMIN and DATAMAX keywords are found.
+Flag
+{\bf -scanmax}
+can be used to force the program to scan the data even when DATAMIN
+and DATAMAX are found in the header. If 
+{\bf -printmax}
+is specified, the program will just print the min and max values and
+quit.
+Flag
+{\bf -noraw}
+can be used to force 
+the program to produce an ASCII portable anymap.
+\par
+The program will tell what kind of anymap is writing.
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+FITS stands for Flexible Image Transport System.  A full description
+can be found in Astronomy \& Astrophysics Supplement Series 44 (1981),
+page 363.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtofits(1), pgm(5), pnmflip(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer, with modifications by 
+Daniel Briggs (dbriggs@nrao.edu) and Alberto
+Accomazzi (alberto@cfa.harvard.edu).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: fitstopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:24 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: fstopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: fstopgm.1
+%
+\phead{fstopgm}{1}{06 April 89}{}{}
+
+%.IX fstopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+fstopgm - convert a Usenix FaceSaver(tm) file into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf fstopgm}
+{\rm [}{\it fsfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Usenix FaceSaver(tm) file as input.
+%.IX FaceSaver
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+\par
+FaceSaver(tm) files sometimes have rectangular pixels.
+While
+{\it fstopgm}
+won't re-scale them into square pixels for you,
+it will give you the precise
+{\it pnmscale}
+command that will do the job.
+Because of this, reading a FaceSaver(tm) image is a two-step process.
+First you do:
+\nofill
+  fstopgm $>$ /dev/null
+\fill
+This will tell you whether you need to use
+{\it pnmscale.}
+Then use one of the following pipelines:
+\nofill
+  fstopgm $|$ pgmnorm
+  fstopgm $|$ pnmscale -whatever $|$ pgmnorm
+\fill
+To go to PBM, you want something more like one of these:
+\nofill
+  fstopgm $|$ pnmenlarge 3 $|$ pgmnorm $|$ pgmtopbm
+  fstopgm $|$ pnmenlarge 3 $|$ pnmscale $<$whatever$>$ $|$ pgmnorm $|$ pgmtopbm
+\fill
+You want to enlarge when going to a bitmap because otherwise you lose
+information; but enlarging by more than 3 does not look good.
+\par
+FaceSaver is a registered trademark of Metron Computerware Ltd. of
+Oakland, CA.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmtofs(1), pgm(5), pgmnorm(1), pnmenlarge(1), pnmscale(1), pgmtopbm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: fstopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:55 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: g3topbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: g3topbm.1
+%
+\phead{g3topbm}{1}{02 October 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX g3topbm
+\shead{NAME}
+g3topbm - convert a Group 3 fax file into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf g3topbm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -kludge}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -reversebits}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -stretch}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it g3file}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Group 3 fax file as input.
+%.IX "Group 3 fax"
+%.IX fax
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -kludge}}
+\item[{{\bf -kludge}}]
+Tells
+{\it g3topbm}
+to ignore the first few lines of the file;
+sometimes fax files have some junk at the beginning.
+\item[{{\bf -reversebits}}]
+Tells
+{\it g3topbm}
+to interpret bits least-significant
+first, instead of the default most-significant first.
+Apparently some fax modems do it one way and others do it the other way.
+If you get a whole bunch of ``bad code word'' messages, try using this
+flag.
+\item[{{\bf -stretch}}]
+Tells
+{\it g3topbm}
+to stretch the image vertically by
+duplicating each row.
+This is for the low-quality transmission mode.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+The standard for Group 3 fax is defined in CCITT Recommendation T.4.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Probably.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtog3(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Paul Haeberli (paul@manray.sgi.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: g3topbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:56 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: gemtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: gemtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{gemtopbm}{1}{3 December 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX gemtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+gemtopbm - convert a GEM .img file into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf gemtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -d}{\rm ]}
+{\it gemfile}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a GEM .img file as input.
+%.IX GEM
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -d}}
+\item[{{\bf -d}}]
+Produce output describing the contents of the .img file.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+Does not support file containing more than one plane.
+Can't read from standard input.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtogem(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 Diomidis D. Spinellis (dds@cc.ic.ac.uk).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+%
+% end of input file: gemtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:27 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: giftopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: giftopnm.1
+%
+\phead{giftopnm}{1}{29 September 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX giftopnm
+\shead{NAME}
+giftopnm - convert a GIF file into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf giftopnm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -verbose}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -comments}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -image}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it GIFfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a GIF file for input, and outputs portable anymap.
+%.IX GIF
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -verbose}}
+\item[{{\bf -verbose}}]
+Produces verbose output about the GIF file input.
+\item[{{\bf -comments}}]
+Only outputs GIF89 comment fields.
+\item[{{\bf -image}}]
+Output the specified gif image from the
+input gif archive (where
+{\it N}
+is '1', '2', '20'...).
+Normally there is only one image per file, so this option
+is not needed.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{BUGS}
+This does not correctly handle the Plain Text Extension of the GIF89
+standard, since I did not have any example input files containing them.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtogif(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by David Koblas (koblas@netcom.com)
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+%
+% end of input file: giftopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:40 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: gouldtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: gouldtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{gouldtoppm}{1}{20 May 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX gouldtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+gouldtoppm - convert Gould scanner file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf gouldtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it gouldfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a file produced by the Gould scanner as input.
+%.IX "Gould scanner"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Stephen Paul Lesniewski.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: gouldtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:25 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: hipstopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: hipstopgm.1
+%
+\phead{hipstopgm}{1}{24 August 89}{}{}
+
+%.IX hipstopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+hipstopgm - convert a HIPS file into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf hipstopgm}
+{\rm [}{\it hipsfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a HIPS file as input.
+%.IX HIPS
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+\par
+If the HIPS file contains more than one frame in sequence, hipstopgm
+will concatenate all the frames vertically.
+\par
+HIPS is a format developed at the Human Information Processing
+Laboratory, NYU.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: hipstopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:57 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: icontopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: icontopbm.1
+%
+\phead{icontopbm}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX icontopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+icontopbm - convert a Sun icon into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf icontopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it iconfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Sun icon as input.
+%.IX Sun
+%.IX "Sun icon format"
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtoicon(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: icontopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:41 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ilbmtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ilbmtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{ilbmtoppm}{1}{20 June 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ilbmtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+ilbmtoppm - convert an ILBM file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ilbmtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -verbose}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ILBMfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an IFF ILBM file as input.
+%.IX "IFF"
+%.IX "ILBM"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+Supported ILBM types are:
+\begin{TPlist}{Normal ILBMs with 1-16 planes.}
+\item[{Normal ILBMs with 1-16 planes.}]
+\item[{Amiga Extra-Halfbrite (EHB)}]
+\item[{Amiga Hold-and-Modify (HAM) with 3-16 planes.}]
+%.IX "HAM"
+\item[{24 bit.}]
+\item[{Color map (BMHD + CMAP chunk only, nPlanes = 0).}]
+\item[{Unofficial direct color.}]
+1-16 planes for each color component.
+\item[{Chunks used:}]
+BMHD, CMAP, CAMG (only HAM \& EHB flags used), BODY
+unofficial DCOL chunk to identify direct color ILBM
+\item[{Chunks ignored:}]
+GRAB, DEST, SPRT, CRNG, CCRT, CLUT, DPPV, DRNG, EPSF
+\item[{Other chunks (ignored but displayed in verbose mode):}]
+NAME, AUTH, (c), ANNO, DPI
+\item[{Unknown chunks are skipped.}]
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -verbose}}
+\item[{{\bf -verbose}}]
+Give some informaton about the ILBM file.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+Probably.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual - Devices (3rd Ed.)
+Addison Wesley, ISBN 0--201--56775--X
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), ppmtoilbm(1)
+\shead{AUTHORS}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+\nwl
+Modified June 1993 by Ingo Wilken (Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de)
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ilbmtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:41 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: imgtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: imgtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{imgtoppm}{1}{05 September 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX imgtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+imgtoppm - convert an Img-whatnot file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf imgtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it imgfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Img-whatnot file as input.
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+The Img-whatnot toolkit is available for FTP on venera.isi.edu,
+along with numerous images in this format.
+%.IX Img-whatnot
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Based on a simple conversion program posted to comp.graphics by Ed Falk.
+
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: imgtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:19 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: libpbm.3
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: libpbm.3
+%
+\phead{libpbm}{3}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+libpbm - functions to support portable bitmap programs
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\def\Ss{\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}%.ft CW
+\nofill
+}
+\def\Se{\fill
+%.ft P
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}}
+\Ss
+\#include $<$pbm.h$>$
+cc ... libpbm.a
+\Se
+\shead{DESCRIPTION - PACKAGE-WIDE ROUTINES}
+%.SS KEYWORD MATCHING
+\Ss
+int pm\_keymatch( char* str, char* keyword, int minchars )
+\Se
+Does a case-insensitive match of
+{\bf str}
+against
+{\bf keyword}{\rm .}
+{\bf str}
+can be a leading sunstring of
+{\bf keyword}{\rm ,}
+but at least
+{\bf minchars}
+must be present.
+%.SS LOG BASE TWO
+\Ss
+int pm\_maxvaltobits( int maxval )
+int pm\_bitstomaxval( int bits )
+\Se
+Convert between a maxval and the minimum number of bits required
+to hold it.
+%.SS MESSAGES AND ERRORS
+\Ss
+void pm\_message( char* fmt, ... )
+\Se
+{\bf printf()}
+style routine to write an informational message.
+\Ss
+void pm\_error( char* fmt, ... )
+\Se
+{\bf printf()}
+style routine to write an error message and abort.
+\Ss
+void pm\_usage( char* usage )
+\Se
+Write a usage message.
+The string should indicate what arguments are to be provided to the program.
+%.SS GENERIC FILE MANAGEMENT
+\Ss
+FILE* pm\_openr( char* name )
+\Se
+Open the given file for reading, with appropriate error checking.
+A filename of ``-'' is taken as equivalent to stdin.
+\Ss
+FILE* pm\_openw( char* name )
+\Se
+Open the given file for writing, with appropriate error checking.
+\Ss
+void pm\_close( FILE* fp )
+\Se
+Close the file descriptor, with appropriate error checking.
+%.SS ENDIAN I/O
+\Ss
+int pm\_readbigshort( FILE* in, short* sP )
+int pm\_writebigshort( FILE* out, short s )
+int pm\_readbiglong( FILE* in, long* lP )
+int pm\_writebiglong( FILE* out, long l )
+int pm\_readlittleshort( FILE* in, short* sP )
+int pm\_writelittleshort( FILE* out, short s )
+int pm\_readlittlelong( FILE* in, long* lP )
+int pm\_writelittlelong( FILE* out, long l )
+\Se
+Routines to read and write short and long ints in either big- or
+little-endian byte order.
+\shead{DESCRIPTION - PBM-SPECIFIC ROUTINES}
+%.SS TYPES AND CONSTANTS
+\Ss
+typedef ... bit;
+\#define PBM\_WHITE ...
+\#define PBM\_BLACK ...
+\Se
+each
+{\bf bit}
+should contain only the values of
+{\bf PBM\_WHITE}
+or
+{\bf PBM\_BLACK}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+\#define PBM\_FORMAT ...
+\#define RPBM\_FORMAT ...
+\#define PBM\_TYPE PBM\_FORMAT
+\#define PBM\_FORMAT\_TYPE(f) ...
+\Se
+For distinguishing different file formats and types.
+%.SS INITIALIZATION
+\Ss
+void pbm\_init( int* argcP, char* argv[] )
+\Se
+All PBM programs must call this routine.
+%.SS MEMORY MANAGEMENT
+\Ss
+bit** pbm\_allocarray( int cols, int rows )
+\Se
+Allocate an array of bits.
+\Ss
+bit* pbm\_allocrow( int cols )
+\Se
+Allocate a row of the given number of bits.
+\Ss
+void pbm\_freearray( bit** bits, int rows )
+\Se
+Free the array allocated with
+{\bf pbm\_allocarray()}
+containing the given number
+of rows.
+\Ss
+void pbm\_freerow( bit* bitrow )
+\Se
+Free a row of bits.
+%.SS READING FILES
+\Ss
+void pbm\_readpbminit( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, int* formatP )
+\Se
+Read the header from a PBM file, filling in the rows, cols and format
+variables.
+\Ss
+void pbm\_readpbmrow( FILE* fp, bit* bitrow, int cols, int format )
+\Se
+Read a row of bits into the bitrow array.
+Format and cols were filled in by
+{\bf pbm\_readpbminit()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+bit** pbm\_readpbm( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP )
+\Se
+Read an entire bitmap file into memory, returning the allocated array and
+filling in the rows and cols variables.
+This function combines
+{\bf pbm\_readpbminit()}{\rm ,}
+{\bf pbm\_allocarray()}
+and
+{\bf pbm\_readpbmrow()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+char* pm\_read\_unknown\_size( FILE* fp, long* nread )
+\Se
+Read an entire file or input stream of unknown size to a buffer.
+Allocate memory more memory as needed. The calling routine has
+to free the allocated buffer with
+{\bf free()}{\rm .}
+{\bf pm\_read\_unknown\_size()}
+returns a pointer to the allocated buffer. The
+{\bf nread}
+argument returns the number of bytes read.
+%.SS WRITING FILES
+\Ss
+void pbm\_writepbminit( FILE* fp, int cols, int rows, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header for a portable bitmap file.
+The forceplain flag forces a plain-format file to be written, as opposed
+to a raw-format one.
+\Ss
+void pbm\_writepbmrow( FILE* fp, bit* bitrow, int cols, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write a row from a portable bitmap.
+\Ss
+void pbm\_writepbm( FILE* fp, bit** bits, int cols, int rows, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header and all data for a portable bitmap.
+This function combines
+{\bf pbm\_writepbminit()}
+and
+{\bf pbm\_writepbmrow()}{\rm .}
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+libpgm(3), libppm(3), libpnm(3)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Tony Hansen and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: libpbm.3
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:37 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: libpgm.3
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: libpgm.3
+%
+\phead{libpgm}{3}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+libpgm - functions to support portable graymap programs
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\def\Ss{\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}%.ft CW
+\nofill
+}
+\def\Se{\fill
+%.ft P
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}}
+\Ss
+\#include $<$pgm.h$>$
+cc ... libpgm.a libpbm.a
+\Se
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+%.SS TYPES AND CONSTANTS
+\Ss
+typedef ... gray;
+\#define PGM\_MAXMAXVAL ...
+extern gray pgm\_pbmmaxval;
+\Se
+Each
+{\bf gray}
+should contain only the values between
+{\bf 0}
+and
+{\bf PGM\_MAXMAXVAL}{\rm .}
+{\bf pgm\_pbmmaxval}
+is the maxval used when a PGM program reads a PBM file.
+Normally it is 1; however, for some programs, a larger value gives better
+results.
+\Ss
+\#define PGM\_FORMAT ...
+\#define RPGM\_FORMAT ...
+\#define PGM\_TYPE PGM\_FORMAT
+int PGM\_FORMAT\_TYPE( int format )
+\Se
+For distinguishing different file formats and types.
+%.SS INITIALIZATION
+\Ss
+void pgm\_init( int* argcP, char* argv[] )
+\Se
+All PGM programs must call this routine.
+%.SS MEMORY MANAGEMENT
+\Ss
+gray** pgm\_allocarray( int cols, int rows )
+\Se
+Allocate an array of grays.
+\Ss
+gray* pgm\_allocrow( int cols )
+\Se
+Allocate a row of the given number of grays.
+\Ss
+void pgm\_freearray( gray** grays, int rows )
+\Se
+Free the array allocated with
+{\bf pgm\_allocarray()}
+containing the given number
+of rows.
+\Ss
+void pgm\_freerow( gray* grayrow )
+\Se
+Free a row of grays.
+%.SS READING FILES
+\Ss
+void pgm\_readpgminit( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, gray* maxvalP, int* formatP )
+\Se
+Read the header from a PGM file, filling in the rows, cols, maxval and format
+variables.
+\Ss
+void pgm\_readpgmrow( FILE* fp, gray* grayrow, int cols, gray maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Read a row of grays into the grayrow array.
+Format, cols, and maxval were filled in by
+{\bf pgm\_readpgminit()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+gray** pgm\_readpgm( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, gray* maxvalP )
+\Se
+Read an entire graymap file into memory, returning the allocated array and
+filling in the rows, cols and maxval variables.
+This function combines
+{\bf pgm\_readpgminit()}{\rm ,}
+{\bf pgm\_allocarray()}
+and
+{\bf pgm\_readpgmrow()}{\rm .}
+%.SS WRITING FILES
+\Ss
+void pgm\_writepgminit( FILE* fp, int cols, int rows, gray maxval, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header for a portable graymap file.
+The forceplain flag forces a plain-format file to be written, as opposed
+to a raw-format one.
+\Ss
+void pgm\_writepgmrow( FILE* fp, gray* grayrow, int cols, gray maxval, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write a row from a portable graymap.
+\Ss
+void pgm\_writepgm( FILE* fp, gray** grays, int cols, int rows, gray maxval, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header and all data for a portable graymap.
+This function combines
+{\bf pgm\_writepgminit()}
+and
+{\bf pgm\_writepgmrow()}{\rm .}
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+libpbm(3), libppm(3), libpnm(3)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Tony Hansen and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: libpgm.3
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:34 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: libpnm.3
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: libpnm.3
+%
+\phead{libpnm}{3}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+libpnm - functions to support portable anymap programs
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\def\Ss{\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}%.ft CW
+\nofill
+}
+\def\Se{\fill
+%.ft P
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}}
+\Ss
+\#include $<$pnm.h$>$
+cc ... libpnm.a libppm.a libpgm.a libpbm.a
+\Se
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+%.SS TYPES AND CONSTANTS
+\Ss
+typedef ... xel;
+typedef ... xelval;
+\#define PNM\_MAXMAXVAL ...
+extern xelval pnm\_pbmmaxval;
+\Se
+Each
+{\bf xel}
+contains three
+{\bf xelval}{\rm s,}
+each of which should contain only the values between
+{\bf 0}
+and
+{\bf PNM\_MAXMAXVAL}{\rm .}
+{\bf pnm\_pbmmaxval}
+is the maxval used when a PNM program reads a PBM file.
+Normally it is 1; however, for some programs, a larger value gives better
+results.
+%.SS XEL MANIPULATIONS
+\Ss
+xelval PNM\_GET1( xel x )
+\Se
+This macro extracts a single value from an xel, when you know it's
+from a PBM or PGM file.
+When it's from a PPM file, use
+{\bf PPM\_GETR()}{\rm ,}
+{\bf PPM\_GETG()}{\rm ,}
+and
+{\bf PPM\_GETB()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+void PNM\_ASSIGN1( xel x, xelval v )
+\Se
+This macro assigns a single value to an xel, when you know it's
+from a PBM or PGM file.
+When it's from a PPM file, use
+{\bf PPM\_ASSIGN()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+int PNM\_EQUAL( xel x, xel y )
+\Se
+This macro checks two xels for equality.
+\Ss
+int PNM\_FORMAT\_TYPE( int format )
+\Se
+For distinguishing different file types.
+%.SS INITIALIZATION
+\Ss
+void pnm\_init( int* argcP, char* argv[] )
+\Se
+All PNM programs must call this routine.
+%.SS MEMORY MANAGEMENT
+\Ss
+xel** pnm\_allocarray( int cols, int rows )
+\Se
+Allocate an array of xels.
+\Ss
+xel* pnm\_allocrow( int cols )
+\Se
+Allocate a row of the given number of xels.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_freearray( xel** xels, int rows )
+\Se
+Free the array allocated with
+{\bf pnm\_allocarray()}
+containing the given number
+of rows.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_freerow( xel* xelrow )
+\Se
+Free a row of xels.
+%.SS READING FILES
+\Ss
+void pnm\_readpnminit( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, xelval* maxvalP, int* formatP )
+\Se
+Read the header from a PNM file, filling in the rows, cols, maxval and format
+variables.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_readpnmrow( FILE* fp, xel* xelrow, int cols, xelval maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Read a row of xels into the xelrow array.
+Format, cols, and maxval were filled in by
+{\bf pnm\_readpnminit()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+xel** pnm\_readpnm( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, xelval* maxvalP, int* formatP )
+\Se
+Read an entire anymap file into memory, returning the allocated array and
+filling in the rows, cols, maxval, and format variables.
+This function combines
+{\bf pnm\_readpnminit()}{\rm ,}
+{\bf pnm\_allocarray()}
+and
+{\bf pnm\_readpnmrow()}{\rm .}
+Unlike the equivalent functions in PBM, PGM, and PPM, it returns the format
+so you can tell what type the file is.
+%.SS WRITING FILES
+\Ss
+void pnm\_writepnminit( FILE* fp, int cols, int rows, xelval maxval, int format, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header for a portable anymap file.
+Unlike the equivalent functions in PBM, PGM, and PPM, you have to specify
+the output type.
+The forceplain flag forces a plain-format file to be written, as opposed
+to a raw-format one.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_writepnmrow( FILE* fp, xel* xelrow, int cols, xelval maxval, int format, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write a row from a portable anymap.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_writepnm( FILE* fp, xel** xels, int cols, int rows, xelval maxval, int format, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header and all data for a portable anymap.
+This function combines
+{\bf pnm\_writepnminit()}
+and
+{\bf pnm\_writepnmrow()}{\rm .}
+%.SS FORMAT PROMOTION
+\Ss
+void pnm\_promoteformatrow( xel* xelrow, int cols, xelval maxval, int format, xelval newmaxval, int newformat )
+\Se
+Promote a row of xels from one maxval and format to a new set.
+Used when combining multiple anymaps of different types - just
+take the max of the maxvals and the max of the formats, and
+promote them all to that.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_promoteformat( xel** xels, int cols, int rows, xelval maxval, int format, xelval newmaxval, int newformat )
+\Se
+Promote an entire anymap.
+%.SS XEL MANIPULATION
+\Ss
+xel pnm\_whitexel( xelval maxval, int format )
+xel pnm\_blackxel( xelval maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Return a white or black xel for the given maxval and format.
+\Ss
+void pnm\_invertxel( xel* x, xelval maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Invert an xel.
+\Ss
+xel pnm\_backgroundxelrow( xel* xelrow, int cols, xelval maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Figure out an appropriate background xel based on this row.
+\Ss
+xel pnm\_backgroundxel( xel** xels, int cols, int rows, xelval maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Figure out a background xel based on an entire anymap.
+This can do a slightly better job than
+{\bf pnm\_backgroundxelrow()}{\rm .}
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(3), pgm(3), ppm(3)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Tony Hansen and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: libpnm.3
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:12 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: libppm.3
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: libppm.3
+%
+\phead{libppm}{3}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+libppm - functions to support portable pixmap programs
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\def\Ss{\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}%.ft CW
+\nofill
+}
+\def\Se{\fill
+%.ft P
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}}
+\Ss
+\#include $<$ppm.h$>$
+cc ... libppm.a libpgm.a libpbm.a
+\Se
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+%.SS TYPES AND CONSTANTS
+\Ss
+typedef ... pixel;
+typedef ... pixval;
+\#define PPM\_MAXMAXVAL ...
+extern pixval ppm\_pbmmaxval;
+\Se
+Each
+{\bf pixel}
+contains three
+{\bf pixval}{\rm s,}
+each of which should contain only the values between
+{\bf 0}
+and
+{\bf PPM\_MAXMAXVAL}{\rm .}
+{\bf ppm\_pbmmaxval}
+is the maxval used when a PPM program reads a PBM file.
+Normally it is 1; however, for some programs, a larger value gives better
+results.
+\Ss
+\#define PPM\_FORMAT ...
+\#define RPPM\_FORMAT ...
+\#define PPM\_TYPE PPM\_FORMAT
+int PPM\_FORMAT\_TYPE( int format )
+\Se
+For distinguishing different file formats and types.
+\Ss
+pixval PPM\_GETR( pixel p )
+pixval PPM\_GETG( pixel p )
+pixval PPM\_GETB( pixel p )
+\Se
+These three macros retrieve the red, green or blue value from the given
+pixel.
+\Ss
+void PPM\_ASSIGN( pixel p, pixval red, pixval grn, pixval blu )
+\Se
+This macro assigns the given red, green and blue values to the pixel.
+\Ss
+int PPM\_EQUAL( pixel p, pixel q )
+\Se
+This macro checks two pixels for equality.
+\Ss
+void PPM\_DEPTH( pixel newp, pixel p, pixval oldmaxval, pixval newmaxval )
+\Se
+This macro scales the colors of pixel
+{\bf p}
+according the old and new maximum values and assigns the new values to
+{\bf newp}{\rm .}
+It is intended to make writing ppmtowhatever easier.
+\Ss
+float PPM\_LUMIN( pixel p )
+\Se
+This macro determines the luminance of the pixel
+{\bf p}{\rm .}
+%.SS MEMORY MANAGEMENT
+\Ss
+pixel** ppm\_allocarray( int cols, int rows )
+\Se
+Allocate an array of pixels.
+\Ss
+pixel* ppm\_allocrow( int cols )
+\Se
+Allocate a row of the given number of pixels.
+\Ss
+void ppm\_freearray( pixel** pixels, int rows )
+\Se
+Free the array allocated with
+{\bf ppm\_allocarray()}
+containing the given number
+of rows.
+\Ss
+void pbm\_freerow( pixel* pixelrow )
+\Se
+Free a row of pixels.
+%.SS READING PBM FILES
+\Ss
+void ppm\_readppminit( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, pixval* maxvalP, int* formatP )
+\Se
+Read the header from a PPM file, filling in the rows, cols, maxval and format
+variables.
+\Ss
+void ppm\_readppmrow( FILE* fp, pixel* pixelrow, int cols, pixval maxval, int format )
+\Se
+Read a row of pixels into the pixelrow array.
+Format, cols, and maxval were filled in by
+{\bf ppm\_readppminit()}{\rm .}
+\Ss
+pixel** ppm\_readppm( FILE* fp, int* colsP, int* rowsP, pixval* maxvalP )
+\Se
+Read an entire pixmap file into memory, returning the allocated array and
+filling in the rows, cols and maxval variables.
+This function combines
+{\bf ppm\_readppminit()}{\rm ,}
+{\bf ppm\_allocarray()}
+and
+{\bf ppm\_readppmrow()}{\rm .}
+%.SS WRITING FILES
+\Ss
+void ppm\_writeppminit( FILE* fp, int cols, int rows, pixval maxval, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header for a portable pixmap file.
+The forceplain flag forces a plain-format file to be written, as opposed
+to a raw-format one.
+\Ss
+void ppm\_writeppmrow( FILE* fp, pixel* pixelrow, int cols, pixval maxval, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write a row from a portable pixmap.
+\Ss
+void ppm\_writeppm( FILE* fp, pixel** pixels, int cols, int rows, pixval maxval, int forceplain )
+\Se
+Write the header and all data for a portable pixmap.
+This function combines
+{\bf ppm\_writeppminit()}
+and
+{\bf ppm\_writeppmrow()}{\rm .}
+%.SS COLOR NAMES
+\Ss
+pixel ppm\_parsecolor( char* colorname, pixval maxval )
+\Se
+Parses an ASCII color name into a pixel.
+The color can be specified in three ways.  One, as a name, assuming
+that a pointer to an X11-style color names file was compiled in.  Two,
+as an X11-style hexadecimal number: \#rgb, \#rrggbb, \#rrrgggbbb, or
+\#rrrrggggbbbb.  Three, as a triplet of decimal floating point numbers
+separated by commas: r.r,g.g,b.b.
+\Ss
+char* ppm\_colorname( pixel* colorP, pixval maxval, int hexok )
+\Se
+Returns a pointer to a string describing the given color.
+If the X11 color names file is available and the color appears in
+it, that name is returned.
+Otherwise, if the hexok flag is true then a hexadecimal colorspec
+is returned; if hexok is false and the X11 color names file is
+available, then the closest matching color is returned;
+otherwise, it's an error.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(3), pgm(3)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Tony Hansen and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: libppm.3
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:25 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: lispmtopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: lispmtopgm.1
+%
+\phead{lispmtopgm}{1}{06 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX lispmtopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+lispmtopgm - convert a Lisp Machine bitmap file into pgm format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf lispmtopgm}
+{\rm [}{\it lispmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Lisp Machine bitmap as input.
+%.IX "Lisp Machine bitmap"
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+\par
+This is the file format written by the tv:write-bit-array-file function on
+TI Explorer and Symbolics lisp machines.
+\par
+Multi-plane bitmaps on lisp machines are color; but the lispm image file
+format does not include a color map, so we must treat it as a graymap 
+instead.  This is unfortunate.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmtolispm(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+The Lispm bitmap file format is a bit quirky;  Usually the image in the file
+has its width rounded up to the next higher multiple of 32, but not always.
+If the width is not a multiple of 32, we don't deal with it properly, but 
+because of the Lispm microcode, such arrays are probably not image data 
+anyway.
+\par
+Also, the lispm code for saving bitmaps has a bug, in that if you are writing a
+bitmap which is not mod32 across, the file may be up to 7 bits too short!  They
+round down instead of up, and we don't handle this bug gracefully.
+\par
+No color.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: lispmtopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:57 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: macptopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: macptopbm.1
+%
+\phead{macptopbm}{1}{29 March 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX macptopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+macptopbm - convert a MacPaint file into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf macptopbm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -extraskip}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it macpfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a MacPaint file as input.
+%.IX MacPaint
+%.IX Macintosh
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -extraskip}}
+\item[{{\bf -extraskip}}]
+This flag is to get around a problem with some methods
+of transferring files from the Mac world to the Unix world.
+Most of these methods leave the Mac files alone, but a few of
+them add the ``finderinfo'' data onto the front of the Unix file.
+This means an extra 128 bytes to skip over when reading the file.
+The symptom to watch for is that the resulting PBM file looks shifted
+to one side.
+If you get this, try
+{\bf -extraskip}
+128, and if that still doesn't look right try another value.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+picttoppm(1), pbmtomacp(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+The MacPaint-reading code is \copyright 1987 by Patrick J. Naughton
+(naughton@wind.sun.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation. 
+%
+% end of input file: macptopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:58 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: mgrtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: mgrtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{mgrtopbm}{1}{24 January 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX mgrtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+mgrtopbm - convert a MGR bitmap into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf mgrtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it mgrfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a MGR bitmap as input.
+%.IX MGR
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtomgr(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: mgrtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:42 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: mtvtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: mtvtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{mtvtoppm}{1}{02 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX mtvtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+mtvtoppm - convert output from the MTV or PRT ray tracers into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf mtvtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it mtvfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an input file from Mark VanDeWettering's MTV ray tracer.
+%.IX "MTV raytracer"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\par
+The PRT raytracer also produces this format.
+%.IX "PRT raytracer"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: mtvtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:20 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbm.5
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbm.5
+%
+\phead{pbm}{5}{27 September 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbm - portable bitmap file format
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+The portable bitmap format is a lowest common denominator monochrome
+file format.
+%.IX "PBM file format"
+It was originally designed to make it reasonable to mail bitmaps
+between different types of machines using the typical stupid network
+mailers we have today.
+Now it serves as the common language of a large family of bitmap
+conversion filters.
+The definition is as follows:
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A ``magic number'' for identifying the file type.
+A pbm file's magic number is the two characters ``P1''.
+%.IX "magic numbers"
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace (blanks, TABs, CRs, LFs).
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A width, formatted as ASCII characters in decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A height, again in ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Width * height bits, each either '1' or '0', starting at the top-left
+corner of the bitmap, proceeding in normal English reading order.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The character '1' means black, '0' means white.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace in the bits section is ignored.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Characters from a ``\#'' to the next end-of-line are ignored (comments).
+\IPitem{{-}}
+No line should be longer than 70 characters.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+Here is an example of a small bitmap in this format:
+\nofill
+P1
+\# feep.pbm
+24 7
+0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
+0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
+0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
+0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
+0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
+0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+\fill
+\par
+Programs that read this format should be as lenient as possible,
+accepting anything that looks remotely like a bitmap.
+\par
+There is also a variant on the format, available
+by setting the RAWBITS option at compile time.  This variant is
+%.IX RAWBITS
+different in the following ways:
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The ``magic number'' is ``P4'' instead of ``P1''.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The bits are stored eight per byte, high bit first low bit last.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+No whitespace is allowed in the bits section, and only a single character
+of whitespace (typically a newline) is allowed after the height.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The files are eight times smaller and many times faster to read and write.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+atktopbm(1), brushtopbm(1), cmuwmtopbm(1), g3topbm(1),
+gemtopbm(1), icontopbm(1),
+macptopbm(1), mgrtopbm(1), pi3topbm(1), xbmtopbm(1),
+ybmtopbm(1),
+pbmto10x(1), pnmtoascii(1), pbmtoatk(1), pbmtobbnbg(1),
+pbmtocmuwm(1), pbmtoepson(1),
+pbmtog3(1), pbmtogem(1), pbmtogo(1), pbmtoicon(1), pbmtolj(1),
+pbmtomacp(1), pbmtomgr(1), pbmtopi3(1), pbmtoplot(1), pbmtoptx(1),
+pbmtox10bm(1), pbmtoxbm(1), pbmtoybm(1),
+pbmtozinc(1),
+pbmlife(1), pbmmake(1), pbmmask(1), pbmreduce(1),
+pbmtext(1), pbmupc(1),
+pnm(5), pgm(5), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbm.5
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:16 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmclean.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmclean.1
+%
+\phead{pbmclean}{12 Dec 1990}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmclean - flip isolated pixels in portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pbmclean [-connect] [pbmfile]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input. Outputs a portable bitmap with every 
+pixel which has less than %
+\it connect %
+\rm identical neighbours inverted.
+Pbmclean can be used to clean up ``snow'' on bitmap images.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Angus Duggan.
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmclean.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:58 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmlife.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmlife.1
+%
+\phead{pbmlife}{1}{21 February 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmlife
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmlife - apply Conway's rules of Life to a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmlife}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Applies the rules of Life to it for one generation,
+%.IX Life
+and produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\par
+A white pixel in the image is interpreted as a live beastie, and a
+black pixel as an empty space.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmlife.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:07:59 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmmake.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmmake.1
+%
+\phead{pbmmake}{1}{22 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmmake
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmmake - create a blank bitmap of a specified size
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmmake}
+{\rm [}{\bf -white}{\rm $|$}{\bf -black}{\rm $|$}{\bf -gray}
+{\rm ]}
+{\it width height}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Produces a portable bitmap of the specified width and height.
+%.IX "generating bitmaps"
+The color defaults to white.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+In addition to the usual
+{\bf -white}
+and
+{\bf -black}{\rm ,}
+this program implements
+{\bf -gray}{\rm .}
+This gives a simple 50\% gray pattern with 1's and 0's alternating.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5), ppmmake(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmmake.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:00 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmmask.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmmask.1
+%
+\phead{pbmmask}{1}{08 August 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmmask
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmmask - create a mask bitmap from a regular bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmmask}
+{\rm [}{\bf -expand}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Creates a corresponding mask bitmap and writes it out.
+\par
+The color to be interpreted as ``background'' is determined automatically.
+Regardless of which color is background, the mask will be white where
+the background is and black where the figure is.
+\par
+This lets you do a masked paste like this, for objects with a black background:
+\nofill
+    pbmmask obj $>$ objmask
+    pnmpaste $<$ dest -and objmask $<$x$>$ $<$y$>$ $|$ pnmpaste -or obj $<$x$>$ $<$y$>$
+\fill
+%.IX pnmpaste
+For objects with a white background, you can either invert them or
+add a step:
+\nofill
+    pbmmask obj $>$ objmask
+    pnminvert objmask $|$ pnmpaste -and obj 0 0 $>$ blackback
+    pnmpaste $<$ dest -and objmask $<$x$>$ $<$y$>$ $|$ pnmpaste -or blackback $<$x$>$ $<$y$>$
+\fill
+%.IX pnminvert
+Note that this three-step version works for objects with black backgrounds
+too, if you don't care about the wasted time.
+\par
+You can also use masks with graymaps and pixmaps, using the
+{\it pnmarith}
+tool.  For instance:
+\nofill
+    ppmtopgm obj.ppm $|$ pgmtopbm -threshold $|$ pbmmask $>$ objmask.pbm
+    pnmarith -multiply dest.ppm objmask.pbm $>$ t1.ppm
+    pnminvert objmask.pbm $|$ pnmarith -multiply obj.ppm - $>$ t2.ppm
+    pnmarith -add t1.ppm t2.ppm
+\fill
+%.IX pnmarith
+An interesting variation on this is to pipe the mask through the
+{\it pnmsmooth}
+%.IX pnmsmooth
+script before using it.  This makes the boundary between the two images less
+sharp.
+%.OPTIONS
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -expand}}
+\item[{{\bf -expand}}]
+Expands the mask by one pixel out from the image.
+This is useful if you want a little white border around your image.
+(A better solution might be to turn the
+{\it pbmlife}
+tool into a general cellular automaton tool...)
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmpaste(1), pnminvert(1), pbm(5), pnmarith(1), pnmsmooth(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmmask.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:16 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmpscale.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmpscale.1
+%
+\phead{pbmpscale}{12 Dec 1990}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmpscale - enlarge a portable bitmap with edge smoothing
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pbmpscale N [ pbmfile ]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input, and outputs a portable bitmap
+enlarged N times. Enlargement is done by pixel replication,
+with some additional smoothing of corners and edges.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmenlarge(1), ppmscale(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Angus Duggan.
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+implied warranty.
+\shead{NOTES}
+pbmpscale works best for enlargements of 2. Enlargements greater than 2
+should be done by as many enlargements of 2 as possible, followed by an
+enlargement by the remaining factor.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmpscale.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:00 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmreduce.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmreduce.1
+%
+\phead{pbmreduce}{1}{02 August 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmreduce
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmreduce - read a portable bitmap and reduce it N times
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmreduce}
+{\rm [}{\bf -floyd}{\rm $|$}{\bf -fs}{\rm $|$}{\bf -threshold}
+{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -value}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\it N}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Reduces it by a factor of
+{\it N}{\rm ,}
+and produces a portable bitmap as output.
+%.IX shrinking
+\par
+{\it pbmreduce}
+duplicates a lot of the functionality of
+{\it pgmtopbm;}
+%.IX pgmtopbm
+you could do something like
+{\bf pnmscale $|$ pgmtopbm,}
+%.IX pnmscale
+but
+{\it pbmreduce}
+is a lot faster.
+\par
+{\it pbmreduce}
+can be used to ``re-halftone'' an image.
+%.IX halftoning
+Let's say you have a scanner that only produces black\&white, not
+grayscale, and it does a terrible job of halftoning (most b\&w scanners
+fit this description).
+One way to fix the halftoning is to scan at the highest possible
+resolution, say 300 dpi, and then reduce by a factor of three or
+so using
+{\it pbmreduce}{\rm .}
+You can even correct the brightness of an image, by using the
+{\bf -value}
+flag.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+By default, the halftoning after the reduction is done via
+boustrophedonic Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion; however, the
+%.IX Floyd-Steinberg
+%.IX "error diffusion"
+{\bf -threshold}
+flag can be used to specify simple thresholding.  This gives better
+%.IX thresholding
+results when reducing line drawings.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -value}
+flag alters the thresholding value for all quantizations.
+It should be a real number between 0 and 1.
+Above 0.5 means darker images; below 0.5 means lighter.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmenlarge(1), pnmscale(1), pgmtopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmreduce.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:01 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtext.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtext.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtext}{1}{5 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtext
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtext - render text into a bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtext}
+{\rm [}{\bf -font}
+{\it fontfile}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it text}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+\par
+Takes the specified text, either a single line from the command
+line or multiple lines from standard input, and renders it
+into a bitmap.
+%.IX text
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+By default, pbmtext uses a built-in font.
+You can also specify your own font with the
+{\bf -font}
+flag.
+The
+{\it fontfile}
+is a pbm file, created in a very specific way.
+In your window system of choice, display the following text
+in the desired (fixed-width) font:
+\nofill
+
+    M ",/\^{}\_[`jpqy$|$ M
+
+    /  !"\#\$\%\&'()*+ /
+    $<$ ,-./01234567 $<$
+    $>$ 89:;$<$=$>$?@ABC $>$
+    @ DEFGHIJKLMNO @
+    \_ PQRSTUVWXYZ[ \_
+    \{ \bs ]\^{}\_`abcdefg \{
+    \} hijklmnopqrs \}
+    \~{} tuvwxyz\{$|$\}\~{}  \~{}
+
+    M ",/\^{}\_[`jpqy$|$ M
+
+\fill
+Do a screen grab or window dump of that text, using for instance
+{\it xwd}{\rm ,}
+{\it xgrabsc}{\rm ,}
+or
+{\it screendump}{\rm .}
+Convert the result into a pbm file.
+If necessary, use
+{\it pnmcut}
+to remove everything except the text.
+Finally, run it through
+{\it pnmcrop}
+%.IX pnmcrop
+to make sure the edges are right up against the text.
+{\it pbmtext}
+can figure out the sizes and spacings from that.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5), pnmcut(1), pnmcrop(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtext.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:02 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmto10x.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmto10x.1
+%
+\phead{pbmto10x}{1}{1 January 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmto10x
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmto10x - convert a portable bitmap into Gemini 10X printer graphics
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmto10x}
+{\rm [}{\bf -h}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a file of Gemini 10X printer graphics as output.
+%.IX "Gemini 10X printer graphics"
+The 10x's printer codes are alleged to be similar to the Epson codes.
+%.IX Epson
+\par
+Note that there is no 10xtopbm tool - this transformation is one way.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The resolution is normally 60H by 72V.
+If the
+{\bf -h}
+flag is specified, resolution is 120H by 144V.
+You may find it useful to rotate landscape images before printing.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Ken Yap.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmto10x.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:02 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoascii.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoascii.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoascii}{1}{20 March 1992}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoascii - convert a portable bitmap into ASCII graphics
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoascii}
+{\rm [}{\bf -1x2}{\rm $|$}{\bf -2x4}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a somewhat crude ASCII graphic as output.
+\par
+Note that there is no asciitopbm tool - this transformation is one-way.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+The
+{\bf -1x2}
+and
+{\bf -2x4}
+flags give you two alternate ways for the bits to get mapped to characters.
+With
+{\bf 1x2}{\rm ,}
+the default, each character represents a group of 1 bit across by 2 bits down.
+With
+{\bf -2x4}{\rm ,}
+each character represents 2 bits across by 4 bits down.
+With the 1x2 mode you can see the individual bits, so it's useful for
+previewing small bitmaps on a non-graphics terminal.
+The 2x4 mode lets you display larger bitmaps on a standard 80-column display,
+but it obscures bit-level details.
+2x4 mode is also good for displaying
+graymaps - ``pnmscale -width 158 $|$ pgmnorm $|$ pgmtopbm -thresh''
+should give good results.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988, 1992 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoascii.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:03 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoatk.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoatk.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoatk}{1}{26 September 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoatk
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoatk - convert portable bitmap to Andrew Toolkit raster object
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoatk}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a Andrew Toolkit raster object as output.
+%.IX "Andrew Toolkit raster object"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+atktopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Bill Janssen.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoatk.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:03 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtobbnbg.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtobbnbg.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtobg}{1}{16 May 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtobbnbg
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtobg - convert a portable bitmap into BitGraph graphics
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtobg}
+{\rm [}{\it rasterop}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it x}
+{\it y}{\rm ]}
+$<$
+{\it pbmfile}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces BBN BitGraph terminal Display Pixel Data (DPD) sequence as output.
+%.IX "BBN BitGraph"
+\par
+The rasterop can be specified on the command line.  If this is omitted, 3
+(replace) will be used.  A position in (x,y) coordinates can also be
+specified.  If both are given, the rasterop comes first.  The portable bitmap
+is always taken from the standard input.
+\par
+Note that there is no bgtopbm tool.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright 1989 by Mike Parker.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtobbnbg.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:04 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtocmuwm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtocmuwm.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtocmuwm}{1}{15 April 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtocmuwm
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtocmuwm - convert a portable bitmap into a CMU window manager bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtocmuwm}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a CMU window manager bitmap as output.
+%.IX "CMU window manager bitmap"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+cmuwmtopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtocmuwm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:17 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoepsi.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoepsi.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoepsi}{1}{1992}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoepsi
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoepsi - convert a portable bitmap into an encapsulated PostScript
+style preview bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoepsi}
+{\rm [}{\bf -bbonly}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produce an encapsulated Postscript style bitmap as output. The output
+is not a stand alone postscript file, it is only a preview bitmap,
+which can be included in an encapsulated PostScript file.
+Note that there is no epsitopbm tool - this transformation is one way.
+
+This utility is a part of the pstoepsi tool by Doug Crabill
+(dgc@cs.purdue.edu).
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -bbonly}}
+\item[{{\bf -bbonly}}]
+Only create a boundary box, don't fill it with the image.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5), pnmtops(1), psidtopgm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 Jef Poskanzer
+\nwl
+modified by Doug Crabill 1992.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoepsi.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:04 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoepson.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoepson.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoepson}{1}{4 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoepson
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoepson - convert a portable bitmap into Epson printer graphics
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoepson}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a file of Epson printer graphics as output.
+%.IX Epson
+\par
+Note that there is no epsontopbm tool - this transformation is one way.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by John Tiller (tiller@galois.msfc.nasa.gov) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoepson.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:05 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtog3.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtog3.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtog3}{1}{02 October 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtog3
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtog3 - convert a portable bitmap into a Group 3 fax file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtog3}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as output.
+Produces a Group 3 fax file as input.
+%.IX "Group 3 fax"
+%.IX fax
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+The standard for Group 3 fax is defined in CCITT Recommendation T.4.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Probably.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+g3topbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Paul Haeberli (paul@manray.sgi.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtog3.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:05 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtogem.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtogem.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtogem}{1}{11 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtogem
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtogem - convert a portable bitmap into a GEM .img file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtogem}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a GEM .img file as output.
+%.IX GEM
+\shead{BUGS}
+It does not support compression of the data.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+gemtopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by David Beckemeyer (bdt!david) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtogem.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:06 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtogo.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtogo.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtogo}{1}{24 November 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtogo
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtogo - convert a portable bitmap into compressed GraphOn graphics
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtogo}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces 2D compressed GraphOn graphics as output.
+%.IX GraphOn
+Be sure to set up your GraphOn with the following modes: 8 bits / no parity;
+obeys no XON/XOFF; NULs are accepted.  These are all on the Comm menu.
+Also, remember to turn off tty post processing.
+Note that there is no gotopbm tool.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988, 1989 by Jef Poskanzer, Michael Haberler, and Bo Thide'.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtogo.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:06 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoicon.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoicon.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoicon}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoicon
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoicon - convert a portable bitmap into a Sun icon
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoicon}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a Sun icon as output.
+%.IX Sun
+%.IX "Sun icon format"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+icontopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoicon.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:07 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtolj.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtolj.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtolj}{1}{29 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtolj
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtolj - convert a portable bitmap into HP LaserJet format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtolj}
+{\rm [}{\bf -resolution}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces HP LaserJet data as output.
+%.IX "HP LaserJet"
+\par
+Note that there is no ljtopbm tool.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -resolution}}
+\item[{{\bf -resolution}}]
+Specifies the resolution of the output device, in dpi.
+Typical values are 75, 100, 150, 300.
+The default is 75.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer and Michael Haberler.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtolj.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:15 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoln03.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoln03.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoln03}{1}{7 May 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoln03
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoln03 - convert protable bitmap to DEC LN03+ Sixel output
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoln03}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rltbf}{\rm ]}
+{\it pbmfile}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+%.IX "DEC LN03+ Sixel"
+Produces a DEC LN03+ Sixel output file.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -l nn}}
+\item[{{\bf -l nn}}]
+Use ``nn'' as value for left margin (default 0).
+\item[{{\bf -r nn}}]
+Use ``nn'' as value for right margin (default 2400).
+\item[{{\bf -t nn}}]
+Use ``nn'' as value for top margin (default 0).
+\item[{{\bf -b nn}}]
+Use ``nn'' as value for bottom margin (default 3400).
+\item[{{\bf -f nn}}]
+Use ``nn'' as value for form length (default 3400).
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Tim Cook, 26 Feb 1992
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoln03.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:18 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtolps.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtolps.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtolps}{12 Dec 1990}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtolps - convert portable bitmap to PostScript
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pbmtolps [ -dpi n ] [ pbmfile ]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input, and outputs PostScript.
+The output Postscript uses lines instead of the image operator to
+generate a (device dependent) picture which will be imaged
+much faster.
+\par
+The Postscript path length is constrained to be less that 1000
+points so that no limits are overrun on the Apple Laserwriter
+and (presumably) no other printers.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmtops(1), ppmtops(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright George Phillips (phillips@cs.ubc.ca).
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtolps.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:08 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtomacp.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtomacp.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtomacp}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtomacp
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtomacp - convert a portable bitmap into a MacPaint file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtomacp}
+{\rm [}{\bf -l}
+{\it left}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -r}
+{\it right}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -b}
+{\it bottom}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -t}
+{\it top}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+If no input-file is given, standard input is assumed.
+Produces a MacPaint file as output.
+%.IX MacPaint
+%.IX Macintosh
+\par
+The generated file is only the data fork of a picture.
+You will need a program such as
+{\it mcvert}
+to generate a Macbinary or a BinHex file that contains the necessary
+information to identify the file as a PNTG file to MacOS.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+Left, right, bottom \& top let you define a square into the pbm file,
+that must be converted.
+Default is the whole file.
+If the file is too large for a MacPaint-file, the bitmap is cut to fit
+from ( left, top ).
+\shead{BUGS}
+The source code contains comments in a language other than English.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtopict(1), macptopbm(1), pbm(5), mcvert(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Douwe van der Schaaf ($\ldots$!mcvax!uvapsy!vdschaaf).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtomacp.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:08 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtomgr.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtomgr.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtomgr}{1}{24 January 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtomgr
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtomgr - convert a portable bitmap into a MGR bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtomgr}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a MGR bitmap as output.
+%.IX MGR
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+mgrtopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtomgr.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:36 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtopgm.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtopgm}{12 Dec 1990}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtopgm - convert portable bitmap to portable graymap by averaging areas
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pbmtopgm $<$width$>$ $<$height$>$ [pbmfile]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input. Outputs a portable graymap created by
+averaging the number of pixels within a sample area of
+%
+\it width %
+\rm by %
+\it height %
+\rm around each point. Pbmtopgm is similar to a
+special case of ppmconvol. A ppmsmooth step may be needed after pbmtopgm.
+\par
+Pbmtopgm has the effect of anti-aliasing bitmaps which contain distinct
+line features.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Angus Duggan.
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+implied warranty.
+\shead{NOTES}
+Pbmtopgm works best with odd sample width and heights.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:09 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtopi3.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtopi3.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtopi3}{1}{11 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtopi3
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtopi3 - convert a portable bitmap into an Atari Degas .pi3 file 
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtopi3}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces an Atari Degas .pi3 file as output.
+%.IX Atari
+%.IX "Degas .pi3"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pi3topbm(1), pbm(5), ppmtopi1(1), pi1toppm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by David Beckemeyer (bdt!david) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtopi3.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:18 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtopk.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtopk.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtopk}{1}{6 August 1990}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtopk - convert a portable bitmap into a packed (PK) format font
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pbmtopk pkfile[.pk] tfmfile[.tfm] resolution [-s designsize] [-p num param...]
+[-C codingscheme] [-F family] [-f optfile] [-c num]
+[-W width] [-H height] [-D depth]
+[-I ital] [-h horiz] [-v vert] [-x xoff] [-y yoff] [pbmfile]...
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads portable bitmaps as input, and produces a packed (PK) font file and a
+TFM (TeX font metric) file as output. The resolution parameter indicates the
+resolution of the font, in dots per inch. If the filename ``-'' is used for any
+of the filenames, the standard input stream (or standard output where
+appropriate) will be used.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-s\ designsize}}
+Sets the design size of the font, in TeX's points (72.27pt to the inch). The
+default design size is 1. The TFM parameters are given as multiples of the
+design size.
+\IPitem{{-p\ num\ param...}}
+Sets the first num font parameters for the font. The first seven parameters
+are the slant,
+interword spacing, interword space stretchability, interword space
+shrinkability, x-height, quad width, and post-sentence extra space of the
+font. Math and symbol fonts may have more parameters; see The TeXbook for a
+list of these. Reasonable default values are chosen for parameters which are
+not specified.
+\IPitem{{-C\ codingscheme}}
+Sets the coding scheme comment in the TFM file.
+\IPitem{{-F\ family}}
+Sets the font family comment in the TFM file.
+\IPitem{{-f\ optfile}}
+Reads the file optfile, which should contain a lines of the form:
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}
+\nofill
+\raggedright
+   filename xoff yoff horiz vert width height depth ital
+\fill
+%.ad
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}
+The pbm files specified by the filename parameters are inserted consecutively
+in the font with the specified attributes. If any of the attributes are
+omitted, or replaced with ``*'', a default value will be calculated from the
+size of the bitmap. The settings of the -W, -H, -D, -I, -h, -v, -x, and -y
+options do not affected characters created in this way.
+The character number can be changed by including a line starting with
+``='',
+followed by the new number.
+Lines beginning with
+``\%'' or ``\#'' are ignored.
+\IPitem{{-c\ num}}
+Sets the character number of the next bitmap encountered to num.
+\IPitem{{-W\ width}}
+Sets the TFM width of the next character to width (in design size multiples).
+\IPitem{{-H\ height}}
+Sets the TFM height of the next character to height (in design size multiples).
+\IPitem{{-D\ depth}}
+Sets the TFM depth of the next character to depth (in design size multiples).
+\IPitem{{-I\ ital}}
+Sets the italic correction of the next character to
+ital (in design size multiples).
+\IPitem{{-h\ horiz}}
+Sets the horizontal escapement of the next character to horiz (in pixels).
+\IPitem{{-v\ vert}}
+Sets the vertical escapement of the next character to vert (in pixels).
+\IPitem{{-x\ xoff}}
+Sets the horizontal offset of the next character to xoff (in pixels).
+\IPitem{{-y\ yoff}}
+Sets the vertical offset of the next character to yoff (in pixels, from the
+top row).
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pktopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Adapted from Tom Rokicki's pxtopk by Angus Duggan (ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk).
+
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtopk.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:09 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoplot.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoplot.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoplot}{1}{1 September 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoplot
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoplot - convert a portable bitmap into a Unix plot(5) file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoplot}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a Unix
+{\it plot}
+file.
+%.IX plot
+\par
+Note that there is no plottopbm tool - this transformation is one-way.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5), plot(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Arthur David Olson.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoplot.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:10 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoptx.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoptx.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoptx}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoptx
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoptx - convert a portable bitmap into Printronix printer graphics
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoptx}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a file of Printronix printer graphics as output.
+%.IX Printronix
+\par
+Note that there is no ptxtopbm tool - this transformation is one way.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoptx.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:10 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtox10bm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtox10bm.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtox10bm}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtox10bm
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtox10bm - convert a portable bitmap into an X10 bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtox10bm}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces an X10 bitmap as output.
+This older format is maintained for compatibility.
+%.IX "X bitmap"
+%.IX "X window system"
+\par
+Note that there is no x10bmtopbm tool, because
+{\it xbmtopbm}
+can read both X11 and X10 bitmaps.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtoxbm(1), xbmtopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtox10bm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:11 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoxbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoxbm.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoxbm}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoxbm
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtoxbm - convert a portable bitmap into an X11 bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoxbm}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces an X11 bitmap as output.
+%.IX "X bitmap"
+%.IX "X window system"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtox10bm(1), xbmtopbm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoxbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:12 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtoybm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtoybm.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtoybm}{1}{06 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtoybm
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtoybm - convert a portable bitmap into a Bennet Yee ``face'' file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtoybm}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces as output a file acceptable to the
+{\it face}
+and
+{\it xbm}
+programs by Bennet Yee (bsy+@cs.cmu.edu).
+%.IX face
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ybmtopbm(1), pbm(5), face(1), face(5), xbm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtoybm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:12 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmtozinc.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmtozinc.1
+%
+\phead{pbmtozinc}{l}{02 November 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmtozinc
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmtozinc - convert a portable bitmap into a Zinc bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmtozinc}
+{\rm [}{\it pbmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable bitmap as input.
+Produces a bitmap in the format used by the Zinc Interface Library
+(ZIL) Version 1.0 as output.
+%.IX "Zinc Interface Library"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by James Darrell McCauley (jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu)
+and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% Zinc and Zinc Interface Library are trademarks of
+% Zinc Software Inc., Pleasant Grove, Utah.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmtozinc.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:13 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pbmupc.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pbmupc.1
+%
+\phead{pbmupc}{1}{14 March 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pbmupc
+\shead{NAME}
+pbmupc - create a Universal Product Code bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pbmupc}
+{\rm [}{\bf -s1}{\rm $|$}{\bf -s2}{\rm ]}
+{\it type manufac product}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Generates a Universal Product Code symbol.
+%.IX "Universal Product Code"
+The three arguments are: a one digit product type, a five digit
+manufacturer code, and a five digit product code.
+For example, ``0 72890 00011'' is the code for Heineken.
+%.IX Heineken
+\par
+As presently configured,
+{\it pbmupc}
+produces a bitmap 230 bits wide and 175 bits high.
+The size can be altered by changing the defines at the beginning of
+the program, or by running the output through
+{\it pnmenlarge}
+or
+{\it pnmscale}{\rm .}
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The
+{\bf -s1}
+and
+{\bf -s2}
+flags select the style of UPC to generate.
+The default,
+{\bf -s1}{\rm ,}
+looks more or less like this:
+\nofill
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+0$|$$|$12345$|$$|$67890$|$$|$5
+\fill
+The other style,
+{\bf -s2}{\rm ,}
+puts the product type digit higher up, and
+doesn't display the checksum digit:
+\nofill
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+0$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+ $|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$$|$
+ $|$$|$12345$|$$|$67890$|$$|$
+\fill
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pbmupc.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:42 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pcxtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pcxtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{pcxtoppm}{1}{9 April 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pcxtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+pcxtoppm - convert a PCX file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pcxtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it pcxfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a PCX file as input.
+%.IX PCX
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtopcx(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Michael Davidson.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pcxtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:38 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgm.5
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgm.5
+%
+\phead{pgm}{5}{12 November 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pgm - portable graymap file format
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+The portable graymap format is a lowest common denominator grayscale
+file format.
+%.IX "PGM file format"
+The definition is as follows:
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A ``magic number'' for identifying the file type.
+A pgm file's magic number is the two characters ``P2''.
+%.IX "magic numbers"
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace (blanks, TABs, CRs, LFs).
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A width, formatted as ASCII characters in decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A height, again in ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The maximum gray value, again in ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Width * height gray values, each in ASCII decimal, between 0 and the specified
+maximum value, separated by whitespace, starting at the top-left
+corner of the graymap, proceeding in normal English reading order.
+A value of 0 means black, and the maximum value means white.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Characters from a ``\#'' to the next end-of-line are ignored (comments).
+\IPitem{{-}}
+No line should be longer than 70 characters.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+Here is an example of a small graymap in this format:
+\nofill
+P2
+\# feep.pgm
+24 7
+15
+0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0
+0  3  3  3  3  0  0  7  7  7  7  0  0 11 11 11 11  0  0 15 15 15 15  0
+0  3  0  0  0  0  0  7  0  0  0  0  0 11  0  0  0  0  0 15  0  0 15  0
+0  3  3  3  0  0  0  7  7  7  0  0  0 11 11 11  0  0  0 15 15 15 15  0
+0  3  0  0  0  0  0  7  0  0  0  0  0 11  0  0  0  0  0 15  0  0  0  0
+0  3  0  0  0  0  0  7  7  7  7  0  0 11 11 11 11  0  0 15  0  0  0  0
+0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0  0
+\fill
+\par
+Programs that read this format should be as lenient as possible,
+accepting anything that looks remotely like a graymap.
+\par
+There is also a variant on the format, available
+by setting the RAWBITS option at compile time.  This variant is
+different in the following ways:
+%.IX RAWBITS
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The ``magic number'' is ``P5'' instead of ``P2''.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The gray values are stored as plain bytes, instead of ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+No whitespace is allowed in the grays section, and only a single character
+of whitespace (typically a newline) is allowed after the maxval.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The files are smaller and many times faster to read and write.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+Note that this raw format can only be used for maxvals less than
+or equal to 255.
+If you use the
+{\it pgm}
+library and try to write a file with a larger maxval,
+it will automatically fall back on the slower but more general plain
+format.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+fitstopgm(1), fstopgm(1), hipstopgm(1), lispmtopgm(1), psidtopgm(1),
+rawtopgm(1),
+pgmbentley(1), pgmcrater(1), pgmedge(1), pgmenhance(1), pgmhist(1), pgmnorm(1),
+pgmoil(1), pgmramp(1), pgmtexture(1),
+pgmtofits(1), pgmtofs(1), pgmtolispm(1), pgmtopbm(1),
+pnm(5), pbm(5), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgm.5
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:26 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmbentley.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmbentley.1
+%
+\phead{pgmbentley}{1}{11 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmbentley
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmbentley - Bentleyize a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmbentley}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Performs The Bentley Effect, and writes a portable graymap as output.
+%.IX "Bentley Effect"
+\par
+The Bentley Effect is described in ``Beyond Photography'' by Holzmann,
+chapter 4, photo 4.
+It's a vertical smearing based on brightness.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmoil(1), ppmrelief(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Wilson Bent (whb@hoh-2.att.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmbentley.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:27 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmcrater.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmcrater.1
+%
+\phead{pgmcrater}{1}{15 October 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmcrater
+%.IX fractals
+%.IX craters
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmcrater - create cratered terrain by fractal forgery
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\raggedright
+{\bf pgmcrater}
+'ti 15
+{\rm [}{\bf -number}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -height}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ysize}
+{\it s}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -width}{\rm $|$}{\bf -xsize}
+{\it s}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -gamma}
+{\it g}{\rm ]}
+%.ad
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+{\bf pgmcrater}
+creates a portable graymap which mimics cratered terrain.  The graymap
+is created by simulating the impact of a given number of craters with
+random position and size, then rendering the resulting terrain
+elevations based on a light source shining from one side of the
+screen.  The size distribution of the craters is based on a power law
+which results in many more small craters than large ones.  The number
+of craters of a given size varies as the reciprocal of the area as
+described on pages 31 and 32 of Peitgen and Saupe[1]; cratered bodies
+in the Solar System are observed to obey this relationship.  The
+formula used to obtain crater radii governed by this law from a
+uniformly distributed pseudorandom sequence was developed by Rudy
+Rucker.
+\par
+High resolution images with large numbers of craters often benefit
+from being piped through
+{\bf pnmsmooth}{\rm .}
+The averaging performed by this process eliminates some of the jagged
+pixels and lends a mellow ``telescopic image'' feel to the overall
+picture.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -number}{\it \ n}
+}
+\item[{{\bf -number}{\it \ n}
+}]
+Causes
+{\it n}
+craters to be generated.  If no
+{\bf -number}
+specification is given, 50000 craters will be generated.  Don't expect
+to see them all!  For every large crater there are many, many more
+tiny ones which tend simply to erode the landscape.  In general, the
+more craters you specify the more realistic the result; ideally you
+want the entire terrain to have been extensively turned over again and
+again by cratering.  High resolution images containing five to ten
+million craters are stunning but take quite a while to create.
+\item[{{\bf -height}{\it \ height}
+}]
+Sets the height of the generated image to
+{\it height}
+pixels.  The default height is 256 pixels.
+\item[{{\bf -width}{\it \ width}
+}]
+Sets the width of the generated image to
+{\it width}
+pixels.  The default width is 256 pixels.
+\item[{{\bf -xsize}{\it \ width}
+}]
+Sets the width of the generated image to
+{\it width}
+pixels.  The default width is 256 pixels.
+\item[{{\bf -ysize}{\it \ height}
+}]
+Sets the height of the generated image to
+{\it height}
+pixels.  The default height is 256 pixels.
+\item[{{\bf -gamma}{\it \ factor}
+}]
+The specified
+{\it factor}
+is used to gamma correct the graymap in the same manner as performed
+by
+{\bf pnmgamma}{\rm .}
+The default value is 1.0, which results in a medium contrast image.
+Values larger than 1 lighten the image and reduce contrast, while
+values less than 1 darken the image, increasing contrast.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{BUGS}
+The
+{\bf -gamma}
+option isn't really necessary since you can achieve the same
+effect by piping the output from
+{\bf pgmcrater}
+through
+{\bf pnmgamma}{\rm .}
+However,
+{\bf pgmcrater}
+performs an internal gamma map anyway in the process of rendering the
+elevation array into a graymap, so there's no additional overhead in
+allowing a user-specified gamma.
+\par
+Real craters have two distinct morphologies.
+{\bf pgmcrater}
+simulates only small craters, which are hemispherical in shape
+(regardless of the incidence angle of the impacting body, as long as the
+velocity is sufficiently high).  Large craters, such as Copernicus and
+Tycho on the Moon, have a ``walled plain'' shape with a cross-section more
+like:
+\nofill
+%.ne 2
+%.cs R 18
+                /\bs                             /\bs 
+\nwl
+          \_\_\_\_\_/  \bs \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_/\bs \_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_/  \bs \_\_\_\_\_
+%.cs R
+\fill
+%.ss 12
+Larger craters should really use this profile, including the central
+peak, and totally obliterate the pre-existing terrain.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+{\bf pgm}{\rm (5),}
+{\bf pnmgamma}{\rm (1),}
+{\bf pnmsmooth}{\rm (1)}
+\begin{TPlist}{[1]}
+\item[{[1]}]
+Peitgen, H.-O., and Saupe, D. eds., The Science Of Fractal Images,
+New York: Springer Verlag, 1988.
+%.ne 10
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\ind{1\parindent}{\nofill
+    John Walker
+    Autodesk SA
+    Avenue des Champs-Montants 14b
+    CH-2074 MARIN
+    Suisse/Schweiz/Svizzera/Svizra/Switzerland
+\fill}
+\begin{TPlist}{Usenet:}
+\item[{Usenet:}]
+kelvin@Autodesk.com
+\item[{Fax:}]
+038/33 88 15
+\item[{Voice:}]
+038/33 76 33
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+without any conditions or restrictions.  This software is provided ``as
+is'' without express or implied warranty.
+\par
+{\bf PLUGWARE!}
+If you like this kind of stuff, you may also enjoy ``James Gleick's
+Chaos--The Software'' for MS-DOS, available for \$59.95 from your
+local software store or directly from Autodesk, Inc., Attn: Science
+Series, 2320 Marinship Way, Sausalito, CA 94965, USA.  Telephone:
+(800) 688-2344 toll-free or, outside the U.S. (415) 332-2344 Ext
+4886.  Fax: (415) 289-4718.  ``Chaos--The Software'' includes a more
+comprehensive fractal forgery generator which creates
+three-dimensional landscapes as well as clouds and planets, plus five
+more modules which explore other aspects of Chaos.  The user guide of
+more than 200 pages includes an introduction by James Gleick and
+detailed explanations by Rudy Rucker of the mathematics and algorithms
+used by each program.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmcrater.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:27 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmedge.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmedge.1
+%
+\phead{pgmedge}{1}{04 February 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmedge
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmedge - edge-detect a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmedge}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Outlines the edges, and writes a portable graymap as output.
+%.IX "edge detection"
+Piping the result through
+{\bf pgmtopbm -threshold}
+and playing with the
+threshold value will give a bitmap of the edges.
+%.IX thresholding
+\par
+The edge detection technique used is to take the Pythagorean sum of
+two Sobel gradient operators at 90 degrees to each other.
+For more details see ``Digital Image Processing'' by Gonzalez and Wintz,
+chapter 7.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmenhance(1), pgmtopbm(1), pgm(5), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmedge.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:28 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmenhance.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmenhance.1
+%
+\phead{pgmenhance}{1}{13 January 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmenhance
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmenhance - edge-enhance a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmenhance}
+{\rm [}{\it -N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Enhances the edges, and writes a portable graymap as output.
+%.IX "edge enhancement"
+\par
+The edge enhancing technique is taken from Philip R. Thompson's ``xim''
+program, which in turn took it from section 6 of ``Digital Halftones by
+Dot Diffusion'', D. E. Knuth, ACM Transaction on Graphics Vol. 6, No. 4,
+October 1987, which in turn got it from two 1976 papers by J. F. Jarvis
+{\it et. al.}
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The optional
+{\it -N}
+flag should be a digit from 1 to 9.
+1 is the lowest level of enhancement, 9 is the highest,
+The default is 9.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmedge(1), pgm(5), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmenhance.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:29 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmhist.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmhist.1
+%
+\phead{pgmhist}{1}{28 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmhist
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmhist - print a histogram of the values in a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmhist}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Prints a histogram of the gray values.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmnorm(1), pgm(5), ppmhist(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmhist.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Feb  4 14:35:48 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmkernel.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmkernel.1
+%
+\phead{pgmkernel}{1}{10 December 1992}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmkernel
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmkernel - generate a convolution kernel
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmkernel} [{\bf --weight}{\it w}] {\it width} [{\it height}]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Generates a portable graymap array of size
+{\it width} x {\it height} (or {\it width} x {\it width} if {\it height}
+is not specified) to be used as a convolution file by
+{\bf pnmconvol}{\rm .}
+The data in the convolution array K are computed according to the
+formula:
+\par
+K(i,j) = 1 / ( 1 + w * sqrt((i-width/2)\^{}2 + (j-height/2)\^{}2)) 
+\par
+where 
+{\it w}
+is a coefficient specified via the 
+{\it --weight}
+flag, and
+{\it width}
+and 
+{\it height}
+are the X and Y filter sizes.
+\par
+The output PGM file is always written out in ASCII format.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+The optional 
+{\it -weight}
+flag should be a real number greater than -1.
+The default value is 6.0.
+\shead{BUGS}
+The computation time is proportional to 
+{\it width}
+* 
+{\it height}{\rm .}
+This increases rapidly with the increase of the kernel size.  
+A better approach could be using a FFT in these cases.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmconvol(1), pnmsmooth(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Alberto Accomazzi (alberto@cfa.harvard.edu).
+%
+% end of input file: pgmkernel.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:21:08 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmnoise.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmnoise.1
+%
+\phead{pgmnoise}{1}{16 November 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmnoise
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmnoise - create a graymap made up of white noise
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmnoise}
+{\it width height}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Creates a portable graymap that is made up of random pixels with
+gray values in the range of 0 to PGM\_MAXMAXVAL (depends on the compilation,
+either 255 or 65535). The graymap has a size of width * height pixels.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Frank Neumann.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmnoise.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:29 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmnorm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmnorm.1
+%
+\phead{pgmnorm}{1}{28 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmnorm
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmnorm - normalize the contrast in a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmnorm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -bpercent}
+{\it N}
+$|$
+{\bf -bvalue}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -wpercent}
+{\it N}
+$|$
+{\bf -wvalue}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Normalizes the contrast by forcing the lightest pixels to white, the
+%.IX "contrast normalization"
+darkest pixels to black, and linearly rescaling the ones in between;
+and produces a portable graymap as output.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+By default, the darkest 2 percent of all pixels are mapped to black, and
+the lightest 1 percent are mapped to white.
+You can override these percentages by using the
+{\bf -bpercent}
+and
+{\bf -wpercent}
+flags,
+or you can specify the exact pixel values to be mapped by using the
+{\bf -bvalue}
+and
+{\bf -wvalue}
+flags.
+Appropriate numbers for the flags can be gotten from the
+{\it pgmhist}
+tool.
+%.IX pgmhist
+If you just want to enhance the contrast, then choose values at elbows in the
+histogram; {\it e.g.}, if value 29 represents 3\% of the image but value 30
+represents 20\%, choose 30 for
+{\it bvalue}{\rm .}
+If you want to lighten the
+image, then set
+{\it bvalue}
+to 0 and just fiddle with
+{\it wvalue}{\rm ;}
+similarly, to darken the image, set
+{\it wvalue}
+to maxval and play with
+{\it bvalue}{\rm .}
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmhist(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Partially based on the fbnorm filter in Michael Mauldin's ``Fuzzy
+Pixmap''
+package.
+
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmnorm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:30 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmoil.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmoil.1
+%
+\phead{pgmoil}{1}{11 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmoil
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmoil - turn a portable graymap into an oil painting
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmoil}
+{\rm [}{\bf -n}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Does an ``oil transfer'', and writes a portable graymap as output.
+%.IX "oil transfer"
+\par
+The oil transfer is described in ``Beyond Photography'' by Holzmann,
+chapter 4, photo 7.
+It's a sort of localized smearing.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The optional
+{\bf -n}
+flag controls the size of the area smeared.  The default value is 3.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Takes a long time to run.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmbentley(1), ppmrelief(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Wilson Bent (whb@hoh-2.att.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmoil.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:30 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmramp.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmramp.1
+%
+\phead{pgmramp}{1}{24 November 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmramp
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmramp - generate a grayscale ramp
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmramp}
+{\bf -lr}{\rm $|$}{\bf -tb}
+$|$
+{\bf -rectangle}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ellipse}
+{\it width height}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Generates a graymap of the specified size containing a black-to-white ramp.
+%.IX "generating graymaps"
+These ramps are useful for multiplying with other images, using the
+{\it pnmarith}
+tool.
+%.IX pnmarith
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -lr}}
+\item[{{\bf -lr}}]
+A left to right ramp.
+\item[{{\bf -tb}}]
+A top to bottom ramp.
+\item[{{\bf -rectangle}}]
+A rectangular ramp.
+\item[{{\bf -ellipse}}]
+An elliptical ramp.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmarith(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmramp.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:35 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmtexture.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmtexture.1
+%
+\phead{pgmtexture}{1}{22 Aug 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmtexture
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtexture - calculate textural features on a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmtexture}
+{\rm [}{\bf -d}
+{\it d}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.  Calculates textural features
+based on spatial dependence matrices at 0, 45, 90, and 135 degrees for
+a distance 
+{\it d}
+(default = 1).
+Textural features include:
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{}}
+(1) Angular Second Moment,
+\nwl
+(2) Contrast,
+\nwl
+(3) Correlation,
+\nwl
+(4) Variance,          
+\nwl
+(5) Inverse Difference Moment,
+\nwl
+(6) Sum Average,
+\nwl
+(7) Sum Variance,
+\nwl
+(8) Sum Entropy,
+\nwl
+(9) Entropy,
+\nwl
+(10) Difference Variance,
+\nwl
+(11) Difference Entropy,
+\nwl
+(12, 13) Information Measures of Correlation, and
+\nwl
+(14) Maximal Correlation Coefficient.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+Algorithm taken from:
+\nwl
+Haralick, R.M., K. Shanmugam, and I. Dinstein. 1973. Textural features
+for image classification.  
+{\it IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man,}
+{\it and Cybertinetics,}
+SMC-3(6):610-621.
+\shead{BUGS}
+The program can run incredibly slow for large images (larger than 64 x 64)
+and command line options are limited.
+The method for finding (14) the maximal correlation coefficient, which
+requires finding the second largest eigenvalue of a matrix Q, does not
+always converge.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+{\it IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man,}
+{\it and Cybertinetics,}
+SMC-3(6):610-621.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgm(5), pnmcut(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Texas Agricultural Experiment Station, employer for
+hire of James Darrell McCauley. 
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% THE TEXAS AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION (TAES) AND THE TEXAS A&M
+% UNIVERSITY SYSTEM (TAMUS) MAKE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+% (INCLUDING BY WAY OF EXAMPLE, MERCHANTABILITY) WITH RESPECT TO ANY
+% ITEM, AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL
+% OR CONSEQUENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE POSESSION OR USE OF
+% ANY SUCH ITEM. LICENSEE AND/OR USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD
+% TAES AND TAMUS HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
+% POSSESSION OF SUCH ITEMS.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmtexture.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:31 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmtofits.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmtofits.1
+%
+\phead{pgmtofits}{1}{20 September 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmtofits
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtofits - convert a portable graymap into FITS format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmtofits}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Produces a FITS file as output.
+%.IX FITS
+\par
+FITS stands for Flexible Image Transport System.  A full description
+can be found in Astronomy \& Astrophysics Supplement Series 44 (1981),
+page 363.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+fitstopgm(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Wilson H. Bent (whb@hoh-2.att.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmtofits.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:31 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmtofs.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmtofs.1
+%
+\phead{pgmtofs}{1}{18 May 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmtofs
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtofs - convert portable graymap to Usenix FaceSaver(tm) format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmtofs}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Produces Usenix FaceSaver(tm) format as output.
+%.IX FaceSaver
+\par
+FaceSaver is a registered trademark of Metron Computerware Ltd. of
+Oakland, CA.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+fstopgm(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmtofs.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:32 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmtolispm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmtolispm.1
+%
+\phead{pgmtolispm}{1}{06 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmtolispm
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtolispm - convert a portable graymap into Lisp Machine format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmtolispm}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Produces a Lisp Machine bitmap as output.
+%.IX "Lisp Machine bitmap"
+\par
+This is the file format read by the tv:read-bit-array-file function on
+TI Explorer and Symbolics lisp machines.
+\par
+Given a pgm (instead of a pbm) a multi-plane image will be output.
+This is probably not useful unless you have a color lisp machine.
+\par
+Multi-plane bitmaps on lisp machines are color; but the lispm image file
+format does not include a color map, so we must treat it as a graymap 
+instead.  This is unfortunate.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+lispmtopgm(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+Output width is always rounded up to the nearest multiple of 32; this might 
+not always be what you want, but it probably is (arrays which are not 
+modulo 32 cannot be passed to the Lispm BITBLT function, and thus cannot 
+easily be displayed on the screen).
+\par
+No color.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmtolispm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:33 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{pgmtopbm}{1}{26 July 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtopbm - convert a portable graymap into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -floyd}{\rm $|$}{\bf -fs}{\rm $|$}{\bf -threshold}
+{\rm $|$}{\bf -dither8}{\rm $|$}{\bf -d8}{\rm $|$}{\bf -cluster3}
+{\rm $|$}{\bf -c3}{\rm $|$}{\bf -cluster4}{\rm $|$}{\bf -c4}
+{\rm $|$}{\bf -cluster8}{\rm $|$}{\bf -c8}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -value}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+%.IX halftoning
+\par
+Note that there is no pbmtopgm converter, because any pgm program can
+read pbm files automagically.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The default quantization method is boustrophedonic Floyd-Steinberg error
+diffusion
+{\rm (}{\bf -floyd}
+or
+{\bf -fs}{\rm ).}
+%.IX Floyd-Steinberg
+%.IX "error diffusion"
+Also available are simple thresholding
+{\rm (}{\bf -threshold}{\rm );}
+%.IX thresholding
+Bayer's ordered dither
+{\rm (}{\bf -dither8}{\rm )}
+with a 16x16 matrix; and three different sizes of 45-degree clustered-dot dither
+{\rm (}{\bf -cluster3}{\rm ,}
+{\bf -cluster4}{\rm ,}
+{\bf -cluster8}{\rm ).}
+%.IX dithering
+\par
+Floyd-Steinberg will almost always give the best looking results; however,
+looking good is not always what you want.
+For instance, thresholding can be used in a pipeline with the
+{\it pnmconvol}
+%.IX pnmconvol
+tool, for tasks like edge and peak detection.
+And clustered-dot dithering gives a newspaper-ish look, a useful special effect.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -value}
+flag alters the thresholding value for Floyd-Steinberg and
+simple thresholding.
+It should be a real number between 0 and 1.
+Above 0.5 means darker images; below 0.5 means lighter.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+The only reference you need for this stuff is ``Digital Halftoning'' by
+Robert Ulichney, MIT Press, ISBN 0--262--21009--6.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmreduce(1), pgm(5), pbm(5), pnmconvol(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:43 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pgmtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pgmtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{pgmtoppm}{1}{11 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pgmtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+pgmtoppm - colorize a portable graymap into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pgmtoppm}
+{\it colorspec}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pgmtoppm}
+{\it colorspec1}{\bf -}{\it colorspec2}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pgmtoppm -map}
+{\it mapfile}
+{\rm [}{\it pgmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable graymap as input.
+Colorizes it by multiplying the the gray values by specified color or colors,
+and produces a portable pixmap as output.
+%.IX colorization
+\par
+If only one color is specified, black in the pgm file stays black and
+white in the pgm file turns into the specified color in the ppm file.
+If two colors (separated by a dash) are specified, then black gets mapped
+to the first color and white gets mapped to the second.
+\par
+The color can be specified in five ways:
+%.IX "specifying colors"
+\begin{TPlist}{o}
+\item[{o}]
+A name, assuming
+that a pointer to an X11-style color names file was compiled in.
+\item[{o}]
+An X11-style hexadecimal specifier: rgb:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+each 1- to 4-digit hexadecimal numbers.
+\item[{o}]
+An X11-style decimal specifier: rgbi:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+\item[{o}]
+For backwards compatibility, an old-X11-style hexadecimal
+number: \#rgb, \#rrggbb, \#rrrgggbbb, or \#rrrrggggbbbb.
+\item[{o}]
+For backwards compatibility, a triplet of numbers
+separated by commas: r,g,b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+(This style was added before MIT came up with the similar rgbi style.)
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+Also, the
+{\bf -map}
+flag lets you specify an entire colormap to be used.
+The mapfile is just a
+{\it ppm}
+file; it can be any shape, all that matters
+is the colors in it and their order.
+In this case, black gets mapped into the first
+color in the map file, and white gets mapped to the last.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+rgb3toppm(1), ppmtopgm(1), ppmtorgb3(1), ppm(5), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pgmtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:43 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pi1toppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pi1toppm.1
+%
+\phead{pi1toppm}{1}{19 July 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pi1toppm
+\shead{NAME}
+pi1toppm - convert an Atari Degas .pi1 into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pi1toppm}
+{\rm [}{\it pi1file}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Atari Degas .pi1 file as input.
+%.IX Atari
+%.IX "Degas .pi1"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtopi1(1), ppm(5), pi3topbm(1), pbmtopi3(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Steve Belczyk (seb3@gte.com) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pi1toppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:13 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pi3topbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pi3topbm.1
+%
+\phead{pi3topbm}{1}{11 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX pi3topbm
+\shead{NAME}
+pi3topbm - convert an Atari Degas .pi3 file into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pi3topbm}
+{\rm [}{\it pi3file}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Atari Degas .pi3 file as input.
+%.IX Atari
+%.IX "Degas .pi3"
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtopi3(1), pbm(5), pi1toppm(1), ppmtopi1(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by David Beckemeyer (bdt!david) and Diomidis D. Spinellis.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+%
+% end of input file: pi3topbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:44 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: picttoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: picttoppm.1
+%
+\phead{picttoppm}{1}{29 November 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX picttoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+picttoppm - convert a Macintosh PICT file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf picttoppm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -verbose}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -fullres}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -noheader}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pictfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a PICT file (version 1 or 2) and outputs a portable pixmap.
+%.IX PICT
+%.IX Macintosh
+Useful as the first step in converting a scanned image to something
+that can be displayed on Unix.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf --fullres}}
+\item[{{\bf --fullres}}]
+Force any images in the PICT file to be output with at least their
+full resolution.  A PICT file may indicate that a contained
+image is to be scaled down before output.  This option forces images
+to retain their sizes and prevent information loss.
+\item[{{\bf --noheader}}]
+Do not skip the 512 byte header that is present on all PICT files.
+This is useful when you have PICT data that was not stored in
+the data fork of a PICT file.
+\item[{{\bf --verbose}}]
+Turns on verbose mode which prints a 
+a whole bunch of information that only
+{\it picttoppm}
+hackers really care about.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+The PICT file format is a general drawing format.
+{\it picttoppm}
+only supports a small subset of its operations but is still very useful for
+files produced by scanning software.  In particular, text added to a
+scanned image will be silently ignored.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+Inside Macintosh volume 5,
+ppmtopict(1),
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 George Phillips (phillips@cs.ubc.ca).
+% Permission is granted to freely distribute this program in whole or in
+% part provided you don't make money off it, you don't pretend that you
+% wrote it and that this notice accompanies the code.
+%
+% George Phillips <phillips@cs.ubc.ca>
+% Department of Computer Science
+% University of British Columbia
+%
+% end of input file: picttoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:44 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pjtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pjtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{pjtoppm}{1}{14 July 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pjtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+pjtoppm - convert an HP PaintJet file to a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pjtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it paintjet}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an HP PaintJet file as input and converts it into a portable pixmap.
+This was a quick hack to save some trees, and it only handles a small
+subset of the paintjet commands.
+In particular, it will only handle 
+enough commands to convert most raster image files.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+HP PaintJet XL Color Graphics Printer User's Guide
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtopj(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Christos Zoulas.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pjtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:19 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pktopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pktopbm.1
+%
+\phead{pktopbm}{1}{6 August 1990}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pktopbm - convert packed (PK) format font into portable bitmap(s)
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pktopbm pkfile[.pk] [-c num] pbmfile ...
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a packed (PK) font file as input, and produces portable bitmaps as
+output. If the filename ``-'' is used for any
+of the filenames, the standard input stream (or standard output where
+appropriate) will be used.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-c\ num}}
+Sets the character number of the next bitmap written to num.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtopk(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Adapted from Tom Rokicki's pxtopk by Angus Duggan (ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk.
+
+%
+% end of input file: pktopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:35 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnm.5
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnm.5
+%
+\phead{pnm}{5}{27 September 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pnm - portable anymap file format
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+The
+{\it pnm}
+programs operate on portable bitmaps, graymaps, and pixmaps, produced by the
+{\it pbm, pgm,}
+and
+{\it ppm}
+segments.  There is no file format associated with
+{\it pnm}
+itself.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+anytopnm(1), rasttopnm(1), tifftopnm(1), xwdtopnm(1),
+pnmtops(1), pnmtorast(1), pnmtotiff(1), pnmtoxwd(1),
+pnmarith(1), pnmcat(1), pnmconvol(1), pnmcrop(1), pnmcut(1),
+pnmdepth(1), pnmenlarge(1), pnmfile(1), pnmflip(1), pnmgamma(1),
+pnmindex(1), pnminvert(1), pnmmargin(1), pnmnoraw(1), pnmpaste(1),
+pnmrotate(1), pnmscale(1), pnmshear(1), pnmsmooth(1), pnmtile(1),
+ppm(5), pgm(5), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnm.5
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Feb  7 08:47:49 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmalias.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmalias.1
+%
+\phead{pnmalias}{1}{30 April 1992}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmalias - antialias a portable anyumap.
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmalias}
+{\rm [}{\bf -bgcolor}
+{\it color}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -fgcolor}
+{\it color}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -bonly}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -fonly}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -balias}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -falias}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -weight}
+{\it w}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input, and applies anti-aliasing to background and
+foreground pixels.
+If the input file is a portable bitmap, the 
+output anti-aliased image is promoted to a graymap, and a message is printed
+informing the user of the change in format.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+{\bf --bgcolor}
+{\it colorb,}
+{\bf --fgcolor}
+{\it colorf}
+\ind{1\parindent}set the background color to 
+{\it colorb,}
+and the foreground to color to
+{\it colorf.}
+Pixels with these values will be anti-aliased. by default,
+the background color is taken to be black, and foreground color
+is assumed to be white.  
+The colors can be specified in five ways:
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf o}}
+\item[{{\bf o}}]
+A name, assuming
+that a pointer to an X11-style color names file was compiled in.
+\item[{{\bf o}}]
+An X11-style hexadecimal specifier: rgb:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+each 1- to 4-digit hexadecimal numbers.
+\item[{{\bf o}}]
+An X11-style decimal specifier: rgbi:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+\item[{{\bf o}}]
+For backwards compatibility, an old-X11-style hexadecimal
+number: \#rgb, \#rrggbb, \#rrrgggbbb, or \#rrrrggggbbbb.
+\item[{{\bf o}}]
+For backwards compatibility, a triplet of numbers
+separated by commas: r,g,b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+(This style was added before MIT came up with the similar rgbi style.)
+\end{TPlist}
+\par\noindent
+Note that even when dealing with graymaps, background and foreground
+colors need to be specified in the fashion described above.
+In this case, background and foreground pixel values are taken to be the
+value of the red component for the given color.
+\ind{1\parindent}
+\par
+{\bf --bonly}{\rm ,}
+{\bf --fonly}
+\ind{1\parindent}Apply anti-aliasing only to background 
+{\rm (}{\bf --bonly}{\rm ),}
+or foreground
+{\rm (}{\bf --fonly}{\rm )}
+pixels.
+\ind{1\parindent}
+\par
+{\bf --balias}{\rm ,}
+{\bf --falias}
+\ind{1\parindent}Apply anti-aliasing to all pixels surrounding background
+{\rm (}{\bf --balias}{\rm ),}
+or foreground
+{\rm (}{\bf --falias}{\rm )}
+pixels.  By default, anti-aliasing takes place only among neighboring
+background and foreground pixels.
+\ind{1\parindent}
+\par
+{\bf --weight}
+{\it w}
+\ind{1\parindent}Use 
+{\it w}
+as the central weight for the aliasing filter.
+{\it W}
+must be a real number in the range
+0 $<$ 
+{\it w}
+$<$ 1.
+The lower the value of 
+{\it w}
+is, the ``blurrier'' the output image is.  The default is w = 1/3.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtext(1), pnmsmooth(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1992 by Alberto Accomazzi, Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmalias.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:17 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmarith.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmarith.1
+%
+\phead{pnmarith}{1}{26 August 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmarith
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmarith - perform arithmetic on two portable anymaps
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmarith}
+{\bf -add}{\rm $|$}{\bf -subtract}{\rm $|$}{\bf -multiply}{\rm $|$}{\bf -difference}
+{\it pnmfile1 pnmfile2}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads two portable anymaps as input.
+Performs the specified arithmetic operation,
+and produces a portable anymap as output.
+The two input anymaps must be the same width and height.
+\par
+The arithmetic is performed between corresponding pixels in the two
+anymaps, as if maxval was 1.0, black was 0.0, and a linear scale in between.
+Results that fall outside of [0..1) are truncated.
+\par
+The operator
+{\it -difference}
+calculates the absolute value of
+{\it pnmarith -subtract pnmfile1 pnmfile2,}
+{\it i.e.}, no truncation is done.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmmask(1), pnmpaste(1), pnminvert(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer..
+Lightly modified by Marcel Wijkstra (wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmarith.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:17 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmcat.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmcat.1
+%
+\phead{pnmcat}{1}{12 March 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmcat
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmcat - concatenate portable anymaps
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmcat}
+{\rm [}{\bf -white}{\rm $|$}{\bf -black}{\rm ]}
+{\bf -leftright}{\rm $|$}{\bf -lr}
+{\rm [}{\bf -jtop}{\rm $|$}{\bf -jbottom}{\rm ]}
+{\it pnmfile pnmfile}
+{\rm ...}
+\nwl
+{\bf pnmcat}
+{\rm [}{\bf -white}{\rm $|$}{\bf -black}{\rm ]}
+{\bf -topbottom}{\rm $|$}{\bf -tb}
+{\rm [}{\bf -jleft}{\rm $|$}{\bf -jright}{\rm ]}
+{\it pnmfile pnmfile}
+{\rm ...}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads portable anymaps as input.
+Concatenates them either left to right or top to bottom, and produces a
+portable anymap as output.
+%.IX concatenation
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+If the anymaps are not all the same height (left-right) or width (top-bottom),
+the smaller ones have to be justified with the largest.
+By default, they get centered, but you can specify one side or the other
+with one of the -j* flags.
+So,
+{\bf -topbottom -jleft}
+would stack the anymaps on top of each other, flush with the left edge.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -white}
+and
+{\bf -black}
+flags specify what color to use to fill in the extra space
+when doing this justification.
+If neither is specified, the program makes a guess.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmcat.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:31 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmcomp.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmcomp.1
+%
+\phead{pnmcomp}{1}{21 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmcomp
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmcomp - composite two portable anymap files together
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmcomp}
+{\rm [}{\it -invert}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it -xoff}{\rm N}{\it ]}
+{\rm [}{\it -yoff}{\rm N}{\it ]}
+{\rm [}{\it -alpha}{\rm pgmfile}{\it ]}
+{\rm overlay}
+{\rm [}{\it pnm-input}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnm-output}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads in a portable any map image and put a overlay upon it, with optional
+alpha mask.  The 
+{\it -alpha pgmfile}
+allows you to also add an alpha mask file to the compositing process, the
+range of max and min can be swapped by using the
+{\it -invert}
+option.
+The
+{\it -xoff}
+and
+{\it -yoff}
+arguments can be negative, allowing you to shift the overlay off the
+top corner of the screen.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1992 by David Koblas (koblas@mips.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmcomp.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:18 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmconvol.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmconvol.1
+%
+\phead{pnmconvol}{1}{13 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmconvol
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmconvol - general MxN convolution on a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmconvol}
+{\it convolutionfile}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads two portable anymaps as input.
+Convolves the second using the first,
+and writes a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX convolution
+\par
+Convolution means replacing each pixel with a weighted average of the
+nearby pixels.  The weights and the area to average are determined by
+the convolution matrix.
+The unsigned numbers in the convolution file are offset by -maxval/2 to
+make signed numbers, and then normalized, so the actual values in the
+convolution file are only relative.
+\par
+Here is a sample convolution file;
+it does a simple average of the nine immediate neighbors, resulting
+in a smoothed image:
+\nofill
+    P2
+    3 3
+    18
+    10 10 10
+    10 10 10
+    10 10 10
+\fill
+\par
+To see how this works, do the above-mentioned offset: 10 - 18/2 gives 1.
+The possible range of values is from 0 to 18, and after the offset
+that's -9 to 9.  The normalization step makes the range -1 to 1, and
+the values get scaled correspondingly so they become 1/9 - exactly what
+you want.
+The equivalent matrix for 5x5 smoothing would have maxval 50 and be
+filled with 26.
+\par
+The convolution file will usually be a graymap,
+so that the same convolution gets applied to each color component.
+However, if you want to use a pixmap and do a different convolution to
+different colors, you can certainly do that.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmsmooth(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmconvol.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:18 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmcrop.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmcrop.1
+%
+\phead{pnmcrop}{1}{25 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmcrop
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmcrop - crop a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmcrop}
+{\rm [}{\bf -white}{\rm $|$}{\bf -black}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -left}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -right}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -top}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -bottom}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Removes edges that are the background color,
+and produces a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX cropping
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+By default, it makes a guess as to what the background color is.
+You can override the default with the
+{\bf -white}
+and
+{\bf -black}
+flags.
+\par
+The options
+{\bf -left, -right, -top}
+and
+{\bf -bottom}
+restrict cropping to the sides specified. The default is to crop all sides of
+the image.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmcut(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmcrop.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:19 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmcut.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmcut.1
+%
+\phead{pnmcut}{1}{21 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmcut
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmcut - cut a rectangle out of a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmcut}
+{\it x y width height}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Extracts the specified rectangle,
+and produces a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX cut
+The
+{\it x}
+and
+{\it y}
+can be negative, in which case they are interpreted
+relative to the right and bottom of the anymap, respectively.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmcut.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:20 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmdepth.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmdepth.1
+%
+\phead{pnmdepth}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmdepth
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmdepth - change the maxval in a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmdepth}
+{\it newmaxval}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Scales all the pixel values, and writes out the image with the new maxval.
+Scaling the colors down to a smaller maxval will result in some loss
+of information.
+\par
+Be careful of off-by-one errors when choosing the new maxval.
+For instance, if you want the color values to be five bits wide,
+use a maxval of 31, not 32.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5), ppmquant(1), ppmdither(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmdepth.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:20 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmenlarge.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmenlarge.1
+%
+\phead{pnmenlarge}{1}{26 February 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmenlarge
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmenlarge - read a portable anymap and enlarge it N times
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmenlarge}
+{\it N}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Replicates its pixels
+{\it N}
+times, and produces a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX enlarging
+\par
+{\it pnmenlarge}
+can only enlarge by integer factors.
+The slower but more general
+{\it pnmscale}
+%.IX pnmscale
+can enlarge or reduce by arbitrary
+factors, and
+{\it pbmreduce}
+%.IX pbmreduce
+can reduce by integer factors, but only for bitmaps.
+\par
+If you enlarge by a factor of 3 or more, you should probably add a
+{\it pnmsmooth}
+%.IX pnmsmooth
+step; otherwise, you can see the original pixels in the resulting image.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmreduce(1), pnmscale(1), pnmsmooth(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmenlarge.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:21 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmfile.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmfile.1
+%
+\phead{pnmfile}{1}{9 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmfile
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmfile - describe a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmfile}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+{\rm ...}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads one or more portable anymaps as input.
+Writes out short descriptions of the image type, size, etc.
+This is mostly for use in shell scripts, so the format is not
+particularly pretty.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5), file(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmfile.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:21 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmflip.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmflip.1
+%
+\phead{pnmflip}{1}{25 July 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmflip
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmflip - perform one or more flip operations on a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmflip}
+{\rm [}{\bf -leftright}{\rm $|$}{\bf -lr}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -topbottom}{\rm $|$}{\bf -tb}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -transpose}{\rm $|$}{\bf -xy}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rotate90}{\rm $|$}{\bf -r90}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ccw}
+{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rotate270}{\rm $|$}{\bf -r270}{\rm $|$}{\bf -cw}
+{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rotate180}{\rm $|$}{\bf -r180}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Performs one or more flip operations, in the order specified, and
+writes out a portable anymap.
+%.IX rotation
+%.IX reflection
+%.IX transposition
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The flip operations available are: left for right
+{\rm (}{\bf -leftright}
+or
+{\bf -lr}{\rm );}
+top for bottom
+{\rm (}{\bf -topbottom}
+or
+{\bf -tb}{\rm );}
+and transposition
+{\rm (}{\bf -transpose}
+or
+{\bf -xy}{\rm ).}
+In addition, some canned concatenations are available:
+{\bf -rotate90}
+or
+{\bf -ccw}
+is equivalent to
+{\bf -transpose}
+{\bf -topbottom}{\rm ;}
+{\bf -rotate270}
+or
+{\bf -cw}
+is equivalent to
+{\bf -transpose}
+{\bf -leftright}{\rm ;}
+and
+{\bf -rotate180}
+is equivalent to
+{\bf -leftright}
+{\bf -topbottom}{\rm .}
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmrotate(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmflip.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:29 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmgamma.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmgamma.1
+%
+\phead{pnmgamma}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmgamma
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmgamma - perform gamma correction on a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmgamma}
+{\it value}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pnmgamma}
+{\it redvalue greenvalue bluevalue}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Performs gamma correction,
+and produces a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX "gamma correction"
+\par
+The arguments specify what gamma value(s) to use.
+A value of 1.0 leaves the image alone, less than one darkens it,
+and greater than one lightens it.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Bill Davidson and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmgamma.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:22 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnminvert.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnminvert.1
+%
+\phead{pnminvert}{1}{08 August 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnminvert
+\shead{NAME}
+pnminvert - invert a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnminvert}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Inverts it black for white and produces a portable anymap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnminvert.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:32 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmnlfilt.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmnlfilt.1
+%
+\phead{pnmnlfilt}{1}{5 February 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmnlfilt
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmnlfilt - non-linear filters: smooth, alpha trim mean, optimal
+estimation smoothing, edge enhancement.
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmnlfilt}
+{\rm alpha}
+{\rm radius}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+%.IX smoothing
+%.IX dithering
+%.IX alpha trim
+%.IX mean filter
+%.IX median filter
+%.IX optimal estimation
+This is something of a swiss army knife filter. It has 3 distinct operating
+modes. In all of the modes each pixel in the image is examined and processed
+according to it and its surrounding pixels values. Rather than using the
+9 pixels in a 3x3 block, 7 hexagonal area samples are taken, the size of
+the hexagons being controlled by the radius parameter. A radius value of
+0.3333 means that the 7 hexagons exactly fit into the center pixel ({\it i.e.},
+there will be no filtering effect). A radius value of 1.0 means that
+the 7 hexagons exactly fit a 3x3 pixel array.
+\shead{Alpha trimmed mean filter.	(0.0 $<$= alpha $<$= 0.5)}
+\par
+The value of the center pixel will be
+replaced by the mean of the 7 hexagon values, but the 7 values are
+sorted by size and the top and bottom alpha portion of the 7 are
+excluded from the mean.  This implies that an alpha value of 0.0 gives
+the same sort of output as a normal convolution ({\it i.e.}, averaging or
+smoothing filter), where radius will determine the ``strength'' of the
+filter. A good value to start from for subtle filtering is alpha = 0.0, radius = 0.55
+For a more blatant effect, try alpha 0.0 and radius 1.0
+\par
+An alpha value of 0.5 will cause the median value of the
+7 hexagons to be used to replace the center pixel value. This sort
+of filter is good for eliminating ``pop'' or single pixel noise from
+an image without spreading the noise out or smudging features on
+the image. Judicious use of the radius parameter will fine tune the
+filtering. Intermediate values of alpha give effects somewhere
+between smoothing and ``pop'' noise reduction. For subtle filtering
+try starting with values of alpha = 0.4, radius = 0.6  For a more blatant
+effect try alpha = 0.5, radius = 1.0
+\shead{Optimal estimation smoothing. (1.0 $<$= alpha $<$= 2.0)}
+\par
+This type of filter applies a smoothing filter adaptively over the image.
+For each pixel the variance of the surrounding hexagon values is calculated,
+and the amount of smoothing is made inversely proportional to it. The idea
+is that if the variance is small then it is due to noise in the image, while
+if the variance is large, it is because of ``wanted'' image features. As usual
+the radius parameter controls the effective radius, but it probably advisable to
+leave the radius between 0.8 and 1.0 for the variance calculation to be meaningful.
+The alpha parameter sets the noise threshold, over which less smoothing will be done.
+This means that small values of alpha will give the most subtle filtering effect,
+while large values will tend to smooth all parts of the image. You could start
+with values like alpha = 1.2, radius = 1.0 and try increasing or decreasing the
+alpha parameter to get the desired effect. This type of filter is best for
+filtering out dithering noise in both bitmap and color images.
+\shead{Edge enhancement. (-0.1 $>$= alpha $>$= -0.9)}
+\par
+This is the opposite type of filter to the smoothing filter. It enhances
+edges. The alpha parameter controls the amount of edge enhancement, from
+subtle (-0.1) to blatant (-0.9). The radius parameter controls the effective
+radius as usual, but useful values are between 0.5 and 0.9. Try starting
+with values of alpha = 0.3, radius = 0.8
+\shead{Combination use.}
+\par
+The various modes of 
+{\bf pnmnlfilt}
+can be used one after the other to get the desired result. For instance to
+turn a monochrome dithered image into a grayscale image you could try
+one or two passes of the smoothing filter, followed by a pass of the optimal estimation
+filter, then some subtle edge enhancement. Note that using edge enhancement is
+only likely to be useful after one of the non-linear filters (alpha trimmed mean
+or optimal estimation filter), as edge enhancement is the direct opposite of
+smoothing.
+\par
+For reducing color quantization noise in images ({\it i.e.}, turning .gif files back into
+24 bit files) you could try a pass of the optimal estimation filter
+(alpha 1.2, radius 1.0), a pass of the median filter (alpha 0.5, radius 0.55),
+and possibly a pass of the edge enhancement filter.
+Several passes of the optimal estimation filter with declining alpha
+values are more effective than a single pass with a large alpha value.
+As usual, there is a tradeoff between filtering effectiveness and loosing
+detail. Experimentation is encouraged.
+\shead{References:}
+\par
+The alpha-trimmed mean filter is 
+based on the description in IEEE CG\&A May 1990 
+Page 23 by Mark E. Lee and Richard A. Redner,
+and has been enhanced to allow continuous alpha adjustment.
+\par
+The optimal estimation filter is taken from an article ``Converting Dithered
+Images Back to Gray Scale'' by Allen Stenger, Dr Dobb's Journal, November
+1992, and this article references ``Digital Image Enhancement and Noise Filtering by
+Use of Local Statistics'', Jong-Sen Lee, IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and
+Machine Intelligence, March 1980.
+\par
+The edge enhancement details are from pgmenhance(1),
+which is taken from Philip R. Thompson's ``xim''
+program, which in turn took it from section 6 of ``Digital Halftones by
+Dot Diffusion'', D. E. Knuth, ACM Transaction on Graphics Vol. 6, No. 4,
+October 1987, which in turn got it from two 1976 papers by J. F. Jarvis
+{\it et. al.}
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmenhance(1), pnmconvol(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+Integers and tables may overflow if PPM\_MAXMAXVAL is greater than 255.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Graeme W. Gill    graeme@labtam.oz.au
+%
+% end of input file: pnmnlfilt.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:23 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmnoraw.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmnoraw.1
+%
+\phead{pnmnoraw}{1}{8 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmnoraw
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmnoraw - force a portable anymap into plain format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmnoraw}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Writes it out in plain (non-raw) format.
+This is fairly useless if you haven't defined the PBMPLUS\_RAWBITS
+compile-time option.
+%.IX RAWBITS
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmnoraw.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:33 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmpad.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmpad.1
+%
+\phead{pnmpad}{12 Dec 1990}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmpad - add borders to portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+pnmpad [-white$|$-black] [-l\#] [-r\#] [-t\#] [-b\#] [pnmfile]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input. Outputs a portable anymap with extra
+borders of the sizes specified. The colour of the borders can be set to
+black or white (default black).
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmmake(1), pnmpaste(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Angus Duggan.
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmpad.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:23 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmpaste.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmpaste.1
+%
+\phead{pnmpaste}{1}{21 February 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmpaste
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmpaste - paste a rectangle into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmpaste}
+{\rm [}{\bf -replace}{\rm $|$}{\bf -or}{\rm $|$}{\bf -and}
+{\rm $|$}{\bf -xor}{\rm ]}
+{\it frompnmfile x y}
+{\rm [}{\it intopnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads two portable anymaps as input.
+Inserts the first anymap into the second at the specified location,
+and produces a portable anymap the same size as the second as output.
+%.IX paste
+If the second anymap is not specified, it is read from stdin.
+The
+{\it x}
+and
+{\it y}
+can be negative, in which case they are interpreted
+relative to the right and bottom of the anymap, respectively.
+\par
+This tool is most useful in combination with
+{\it pnmcut}{\rm .}
+%.IX pnmcut
+For instance, if you want to edit a small segment of a large
+image, and your image editor cannot edit the
+large image, you can cut out the segment you are interested in,
+edit it, and then paste it back in.
+\par
+Another useful companion tool is
+{\it pbmmask}{\rm .}
+%.IX pnmmask
+%.OPTIONS
+\par
+The optional flag specifies the operation to use when doing the paste.
+The default is
+{\bf -replace}{\rm .}
+The other, logical operations are only allowed if both input images
+are bitmaps.
+%.IX "logical operations"
+These operations act as if white is TRUE and black is FALSE.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmcut(1), pnminvert(1), pnmarith(1), pnm(5), pbmmask(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmpaste.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:29 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmrotate.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmrotate.1
+%
+\phead{pnmrotate}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmrotate
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmrotate - rotate a portable anymap by some angle
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmrotate}
+{\rm [}{\bf -noantialias}{\rm ]}
+{\it angle}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Rotates it by the specified angle
+and produces a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX rotation
+If the input file is in color, the output will be too,
+otherwise it will be grayscale.
+The angle is in degrees (floating point), measured counter-clockwise.
+It can be negative, but it should be between -90 and 90.
+Also, for rotations greater than 45 degrees you may get better results
+if you first use
+{\it pnmflip}
+%.IX pnmflip
+to do a 90 degree rotation and then
+{\it pnmrotate}
+less than 45 degrees back the other direction
+\par
+The rotation algorithm is Alan Paeth's three-shear method.
+Each shear is implemented by looping over the source pixels and distributing
+fractions to each of the destination pixels.
+This has an ``anti-aliasing'' effect - it avoids jagged edges and similar
+artifacts.
+%.IX anti-aliasing
+However, it also means that the original colors or gray levels in the image
+are modified.
+If you need to keep precisely the same set of colors, you can use the
+{\bf -noantialias}
+flag.  This does the shearing by moving pixels without changing their values.
+If you want anti-aliasing and don't care about the precise colors, but
+still need a limited *number* of colors, you can run the result through
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm .}
+%.IX ppmquant
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+``A Fast Algorithm for General Raster Rotation'' by Alan Paeth,
+Graphics Interface '86, pp. 77-81.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmshear(1), pnmflip(1), pnm(5), ppmquant(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmrotate.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:24 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmscale.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmscale.1
+%
+\phead{pnmscale}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmscale
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmscale - scale a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmscale}
+{\it s}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pnmscale}
+{\bf -xsize}{\rm $|$}{\bf -width}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ysize}{\rm $|$}
+{\bf -height}
+{\it s}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pnmscale}
+{\bf -xscale}{\rm $|$}{\bf -yscale}
+{\it s}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pnmscale}
+{\bf -xscale}{\rm $|$}{\bf -xsize}{\rm $|$}{\bf -width}
+{\it s}
+{\bf -yscale}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ysize}{\rm $|$}{\bf -height}
+{\it s}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf pnmscale -xysize}
+{\it x y}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Scales it by the specified factor or factors and produces a portable
+anymap as output.
+%.IX shrinking
+%.IX enlarging
+If the input file is in color, the output will be too,
+otherwise it will be grayscale.
+You can both enlarge (scale factor $>$ 1) and reduce (scale factor $<$ 1).
+\par
+You can specify one dimension as a pixel size, and the other dimension
+will be scaled correspondingly.
+\par
+You can specify one dimension as a scale, and the other dimension
+will not be scaled.
+\par
+You can specify different sizes or scales for each axis.
+\par
+Or, you can use the special
+{\bf -xysize}
+flag, which fits the image into
+the specified size without changing the aspect ratio.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\par
+If you enlarge by a factor of 3 or more, you should probably add a
+{\it pnmsmooth}
+%.IX pnmsmooth
+step; otherwise, you can see the original pixels in the resulting image.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmreduce(1), pnmenlarge(1), pnmsmooth(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmscale.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:30 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmshear.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmshear.1
+%
+\phead{pnmshear}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmshear
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmshear - shear a portable anymap by some angle
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmshear}
+{\rm [}{\bf -noantialias}{\rm ]}
+{\it angle}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Shears it by the specified angle and produces a portable
+anymap as output.
+%.IX shearing
+If the input file is in color, the output will be too,
+otherwise it will be grayscale.
+The angle is in degrees (floating point), and measures this:
+\nofill
+    +-------+  +-------+
+    $|$       $|$  $|$\bs        \bs 
+    $|$  OLD  $|$  $|$ \bs   NEW  \bs 
+    $|$       $|$  $|$an\bs        \bs 
+    +-------+  $|$gle+-------+
+\fill
+If the angle is negative, it shears the other way:
+\nofill
+    +-------+  $|$-an+-------+
+    $|$       $|$  $|$gl/       /
+    $|$  OLD  $|$  $|$e/  NEW  /
+    $|$       $|$  $|$/       /
+    +-------+  +-------+
+\fill
+The angle should not get too close to 90 or -90, or the resulting
+anymap will be unreasonably wide.
+\par
+The shearing is implemented by looping over the source pixels and distributing
+fractions to each of the destination pixels.
+This has an ``anti-aliasing'' effect - it avoids jagged edges and similar
+artifacts.
+%.IX anti-aliasing
+However, it also means that the original colors or gray levels in the image
+are modified.
+If you need to keep precisely the same set of colors, you can use
+the
+{\bf -noantialias}
+flag.  This does the shearing by moving pixels without changing their values.
+If you want anti-aliasing and don't care about the precise colors, but
+still need a limited *number* of colors, you can run the result through
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm .}
+%.IX ppmquant
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmrotate(1), pnmflip(1), pnm(5), ppmquant(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmshear.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:24 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtile.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtile.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtile}{1}{13 May 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmtile
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtile - replicate a portable anymap into a specified size
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtile}
+{\it width height}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Replicates it until it is the specified size,
+and produces a portable anymap as output.
+%.IX tiling
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtile.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Feb  7 08:49:06 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtofits.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtofits.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtofits}{1}{5 Dec 1992}{}{}
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtofits - convert a portable anymap into FITS format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtofits}
+{\rm [}{\bf --max}
+{\it f}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf --min}
+{\it f}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Produces a FITS (Flexible Image Transport System) file as output.
+The resolution of the output file is either 8 bits/pixel,
+or 16 bits/pixel, depending on the value of maxval in the input file.
+If the input file is a portable bitmap or a portable graymap, the output file
+consists of a single plane image (NAXIS = 2). If instead the input file is
+a portable pixmap, the output file will consist of a three-plane image
+(NAXIS = 3, NAXIS3 = 3).
+A full description of the FITS format
+can be found in Astronomy \& Astrophysics Supplement Series 44 (1981), page 363.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+Flags 
+{\bf --min}
+and 
+{\bf --max}
+can be used to set DATAMAX, DATAMIN, BSCALE and BZERO in the FITS
+header, but do not cause the data to be rescaled.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+fitstopnm(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1989 by Wilson H. Bent (whb@hoh-2.att.com), with
+modifications
+by Alberto Accomazzi (alberto@cfa.harvard.edu).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtofits.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:25 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtops.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtops.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtops}{1}{26 October 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmtops
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtops - convert portable anymap to PostScript
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtops}
+{\rm [}{\bf -scale}
+{\it s}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -turn}{\rm $|$}{\bf -noturn}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rle}{\rm $|$}{\bf -runlength}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -dpi}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -width}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -height}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Produces Encapsulated PostScript as output.
+%.IX PostScript
+\par
+If the input file is in color (PPM), a color PostScript file gets
+written.
+Some PostScript interpreters can't handle color PostScript.
+If you have one of these you will need to run your image through
+{\it ppmtopgm}
+first.
+\par
+Note that there is no pstopnm
+tool - this transformation is one-way, because a pstopnm tool would
+be a full-fledged PostScript interpreter, which is beyond the scope
+of this package.
+However, see the
+{\it psidtopgm}
+tool, which can read grayscale non-runlength PostScript image data.
+Also, if you're willing to install the fairly large GhostScript package,
+it comes with a pstoppm script.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The
+{\bf -scale}
+flag controls the scale of the result.  The default scale is 1,
+which on a 300 dpi printer such as the Apple LaserWriter makes
+the output look about the same size as the input would if it was displayed
+on a typical 72 dpi screen.
+To get one PNM pixel per 300 dpi printer pixel, use ``-scale 0.25''.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -turn}
+and
+{\bf -noturn}
+flags control whether the image gets turned 90 degrees.
+Normally, if an image is wider than it is tall, it gets turned
+automatically to better fit the page.
+If the
+{\bf -turn}
+flag is specified, it will be turned no matter what its shape; and if the
+{\bf -noturn}
+flag is specified, it will
+{\it not}
+be turned no matter what its shape.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -rle}
+or
+{\bf -runlength}
+flag specifies run-length compression.  This may save
+time if the host-to-printer link is slow; but normally the printer's processing
+time dominates, so
+{\bf -rle}
+makes things slower.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -dpi}
+flag lets you specify the dots per inch of your output device.
+The default is 300 dpi.
+In theory PostScript is device-independent and you don't have to
+worry about this, but in practice its raster rendering can have
+unsightly bands if the device pixels and the image pixels aren't
+in sync.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -width}
+and
+{\bf -height}
+flags let you specify the size of the page.
+The default is 8.5 inches by 11 inches.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5), psidtopgm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtops.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:26 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtorast.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtorast.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtorast}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmtorast
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtorast - convert a portable pixmap into a Sun rasterfile
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtorast}
+{\rm [}{\bf -standard}{\rm $|$}{\bf -rle}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a Sun rasterfile as output.
+%.IX Sun
+%.IX rasterfile
+\par
+Color values in Sun rasterfiles are eight bits wide, so
+{\it pnmtorast}
+will automatically scale colors to have a maxval of 255.
+An extra
+{\it pnmdepth}
+step is not necessary.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The
+{\bf -standard}
+flag forces the result to be in RT\_STANDARD form; the
+{\bf -rle}
+flag, RT\_BYTE\_ENCODED, which is smaller but, well, less standard.
+The default is
+{\bf -rle}{\rm .}
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+rasttopnm(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtorast.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:31 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtosir.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtosir.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtosir}{1}{20 March 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtosir - convert a portable anymap into a Solitaire format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtosir}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Produces a Solitaire Image Recorder format.
+\par
+pnmtosir produces an MGI TYPE 17 file for
+{\it pbm}
+and
+{\it pgm}
+files.
+For
+{\it ppm}{\rm ,}
+it writes a MGI TYPE 11 file.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+sirtopnm(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Marvin Landis.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtosir.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:36 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtotiff.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtotiff.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtotiff}{1}{13 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmtotiff
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtotiff - convert a a portable anymap into a TIFF file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtotiff}
+{\rm [}{\bf -none}{\rm $|$}{\bf -packbits}{\rm $|$}
+{\bf -lzw}{\rm $|$}{\bf -g3}{\rm $|$}{\bf -g4}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -2d}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -fill}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -predictor}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -msb2lsb}{\rm $|$}{\bf -lsb2msb}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rowsperstrip}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Produces a TIFF file as output.
+%.IX TIFF
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+By default,
+{\it pnmtotiff}
+creates a TIFF file with LZW compression.
+This is your best bet most of the time.
+However, some TIFF readers can't deal with it.
+If you want to try another compression scheme or tweak some of the
+other even more obscure output options, there are a number of
+flags to play with.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -none}{\rm ,}
+{\bf -packbits}{\rm ,}
+{\bf -lzw}{\rm ,}
+{\bf -g3}{\rm ,}
+and
+{\bf -g4}
+options are used to override the default and set the compression
+scheme used in creating the output file.  The CCITT Group 3 and Group
+4 compression algorithms can only be used with bilevel data.  The
+{\bf -2d}
+and
+{\bf -fill}
+options are meaningful only with Group 3 compression:
+{\bf -2d}
+requests 2-dimensional encoding, while
+{\bf -fill}
+requests that each encoded scanline be zero-filled to a byte boundry.
+The
+{\bf -predictor}
+option is only meaningful with LZW compression: a predictor value of 2
+causes each scanline of the output image to undergo horizontal
+differencing before it is encoded; a value of 1 forces each scanline
+to be encoded without differencing.
+\rm
+By default,
+{\it pnmtotiff}
+creates a TIFF file with msb-to-lsb fill order.
+The
+{\bf -msb2lsb}
+and
+{\bf -lsb2msb}
+options are used to override the default and set the fill order used
+in creating the file.
+\rm
+The
+{\bf -rowsperstrip}
+option can be used to set the number of rows (scanlines) in each
+strip of data in the output file.  By default, the output file has
+the number of rows per strip set to a value that will ensure each
+strip is no more than 8 kilobytes long.
+\shead{BUGS}
+This program is not self-contained.  To use it you must fetch the
+TIFF Software package listed in the OTHER.SYSTEMS file and configure
+PBMPLUS to use libtiff.  See PBMPLUS's Makefile for details on this
+configuration.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+tifftopnm(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Derived by Jef Poskanzer from ras2tiff.c, which is
+\copyright 1990 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.\hfil\break
+Author: Patrick J. Naughton (naughton@wind.sun.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+% 
+% This file is provided AS IS with no warranties of any kind.  The author
+% shall have no liability with respect to the infringement of copyrights,
+% trade secrets or any patents by this file or any part thereof.  In no
+% event will the author be liable for any lost revenue or profits or
+% other special, indirect and consequential damages.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtotiff.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:26 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: pnmtoxwd.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: pnmtoxwd.1
+%
+\phead{pnmtoxwd}{1}{24 September 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX pnmtoxwd
+\shead{NAME}
+pnmtoxwd - convert a portable anymap into an X11 window dump
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf pnmtoxwd}
+{\rm [}{\bf -pseudodepth}
+{\it n}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -directcolor}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it pnmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable anymap as input.
+Produces an X11 window dump as output.
+%.IX XWD
+%.IX "X window system"
+This window dump can be displayed using the xwud tool.
+\par
+Normally, pnmtoxwd produces a StaticGray dump file for
+{\it pbm}
+and
+{\it pgm}
+files.
+For
+{\it ppm}{\rm ,}
+it writes a PseudoColor dump file if there are up
+to 256 colors in the input, and a DirectColor dump file otherwise.
+The
+{\bf -directcolor}
+flag can be used to force a DirectColor dump.
+And the
+{\bf -pseudodepth}
+flag can be used to change the depth of PseudoColor dumps from the default
+of 8 bits / 256 colors.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+xwdtopnm(1), pnm(5), xwud(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: pnmtoxwd.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:13 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppm.5
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppm.5
+%
+\phead{ppm}{5}{27 September 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+ppm - portable pixmap file format
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+The portable pixmap format is a lowest common denominator color image
+file format.
+%.IX "PPM file format"
+The definition is as follows:
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A ``magic number'' for identifying the file type.
+A ppm file's magic number is the two characters ``P3''.
+%.IX "magic numbers"
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace (blanks, TABs, CRs, LFs).
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A width, formatted as ASCII characters in decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+A height, again in ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The maximum color-component value, again in ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Width * height pixels, each three ASCII decimal values between 0 and the
+specified maximum value, starting at the top-left
+corner of the pixmap, proceeding in normal English reading order.
+The three values for each pixel represent red, green, and blue, respectively;
+a value of 0 means that color is off, and the maximum value means that color
+is maxxed out.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Characters from a ``\#'' to the next end-of-line are ignored (comments).
+\IPitem{{-}}
+No line should be longer than 70 characters.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+Here is an example of a small pixmap in this format:
+\nofill
+P3
+\# feep.ppm
+4 4
+15
+ 0  0  0    0  0  0    0  0  0   15  0 15
+ 0  0  0    0 15  7    0  0  0    0  0  0
+ 0  0  0    0  0  0    0 15  7    0  0  0
+15  0 15    0  0  0    0  0  0    0  0  0
+\fill
+\par
+Programs that read this format should be as lenient as possible,
+accepting anything that looks remotely like a pixmap.
+\par
+There is also a variant on the format, available
+by setting the RAWBITS option at compile time.  This variant is
+different in the following ways:
+%.IX RAWBITS
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The ``magic number'' is ``P6'' instead of ``P3''.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The pixel values are stored as plain bytes, instead of ASCII decimal.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+Whitespace is not allowed in the pixels area, and only a single character
+of whitespace (typically a newline) is allowed after the maxval.
+\IPitem{{-}}
+The files are smaller and many times faster to read and write.
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+Note that this raw format can only be used for maxvals less than
+or equal to 255.
+If you use the
+{\it ppm}
+library and try to write a file with a larger maxval,
+it will automatically fall back on the slower but more general plain
+format.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+giftoppm(1), gouldtoppm(1), ilbmtoppm(1), imgtoppm(1), mtvtoppm(1),
+pcxtoppm(1), pgmtoppm(1), pi1toppm(1), picttoppm(1), pjtoppm(1), qrttoppm(1),
+rawtoppm(1), rgb3toppm(1), sldtoppm(1), spctoppm(1), sputoppm(1), tgatoppm(1),
+ximtoppm(1), xpmtoppm(1), yuvtoppm(1),
+ppmtoacad(1), ppmtogif(1), ppmtoicr(1), ppmtoilbm(1), ppmtopcx(1), ppmtopgm(1),
+ppmtopi1(1), ppmtopict(1), ppmtopj(1), ppmtopuzz(1), ppmtorgb3(1),
+ppmtosixel(1), ppmtotga(1), ppmtouil(1), ppmtoxpm(1), ppmtoyuv(1),
+ppmdither(1), ppmforge(1), ppmhist(1), ppmmake(1), ppmpat(1), ppmquant(1),
+ppmquantall(1), ppmrelief(1),
+pnm(5), pgm(5), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppm.5
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:08 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmbrighten.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmbrighten.1
+%
+\phead{ppmbrighten}{1}{20 Nov 1990}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmbrighten - change an images Saturation and Value from an HSV map
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmbrighten [-n] [-s $<$+- saturation$>$] [-v $<$+- value$>$] $<$ppmfile$>$
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Converts the image from RGB space to HSV space and changes
+the Value by $<$+- value$>$ as a percentage.
+Likewise with the Saturation.
+Doubling the Value would involve
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}
+ppmbrighten -v 100
+\par\vspace{1.0\baselineskip}
+to add 100 percent to the Value.
+\par
+The 'n' option normalizes the Value to exist between 0 and 1
+(normalized).
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmnorm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Brian Moffet.
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+implied warranty.
+\shead{NOTES}
+This program does not change the number of colors.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmbrighten.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Feb  7 08:50:59 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmchange.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmchange.1
+%
+\phead{ppmchange}{1}{3 December 1993}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmchange - change all pixels of one color to another in a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmchange}
+{\it oldcolor newcolor [...]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Changes all pixels of 
+{\it oldcolor}
+to 
+{\it newcolor}{\rm ,}
+leaving all others unchanged.
+Up to 256 colors may be replaced by specifying couples of colors on
+the command line.  
+\par
+The colors can be specified in five ways:
+\begin{TPlist}{o}
+\item[{o}]
+A name, assuming
+that a pointer to an X11-style color names file was compiled in.
+\item[{o}]
+An X11-style hexadecimal specifier: rgb:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+each 1- to 4-digit hexadecimal numbers.
+\item[{o}]
+An X11-style decimal specifier: rgbi:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+\item[{o}]
+For backwards compatibility, an old-X11-style hexadecimal
+number: \#rgb, \#rrggbb, \#rrrgggbbb, or \#rrrrggggbbbb.
+\item[{o}]
+For backwards compatibility, a triplet of numbers
+separated by commas: r,g,b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+(This style was added before MIT came up with the similar rgbi style.)
+\end{TPlist}
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmtoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Wilson H. Bent. Jr. (whb@usc.edu)
+with modifications by Alberto Accomazzi (alberto@cfa.harvard.edu)
+%
+% end of input file: ppmchange.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:33:23 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmdim.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmdim.1
+%
+\phead{ppmdim}{1}{16 November 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmdim
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmdim - dim a portable pixmap down to total blackness
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmdim
+{\it dimfactor}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input. Diminishes its brightness by
+the specified dimfactor down to total blackness.
+The dimfactor may be in the range from 0.0 (total blackness,
+deep night, nada, null, nothing) to 1.0 (original picture's
+brightness).
+\par
+As
+{\it pnmgamma}
+does not do the brightness correction in the way I
+wanted it, this small program was written.
+\par
+ppmdim is similar to
+{\it ppmbrighten}
+, but not exactly the same.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), ppmflash(1), pnmgamma(1), ppmbrighten(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1993 by Frank Neumann
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmdim.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:08 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmdist.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmdist.1
+%
+\phead{ppmdist}{1}{22 July 1992}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmdist
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmdist - simplistic grayscale assignment for machine generated, color images
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmdist}
+{\rm [}{\bf -intensity}{\rm $|$}{\bf -frequency}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input, performs a simplistic grayscale
+assignment intended for use with grayscale or bitmap printers.
+
+Often conversion from ppm to pgm will yield an image with contrast too
+low for good printer output.  The program maximizes contrast between
+the gray levels output.
+
+A ppm input of n colors is read, and a pgm of n gray levels is written.
+The gray levels take on the values 0..n-1, while maxval takes on n-1.
+
+The mapping from color to stepped grayscale can be performed in order
+of input pixel intensity, or input pixel frequency (number of repetitions).
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{}
+\item[{}]
+{\bf -frequency}
+Sort input colors by the number of times a color appears in the input,
+before mapping to evenly distributed graylevels of output.
+{\bf -intensity}
+Sort input colors by their grayscale intensity, before mapping to evenly
+distributed graylevels of output.  This is the default.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+Helpful only for images with a very small number of colors.
+Perhaps should have been an option to ppmtopgm(1).
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtopgm(1), ppmhist(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Dan Stromberg.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmdist.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:45 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmdither.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmdither.1
+%
+\phead{ppmdither}{1}{14 July 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmdither
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmdither - ordered dither for color images
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmdither}
+{\rm [}{\bf -dim}
+{\it dimension}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -red}
+{\it shades}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -green}
+{\it shades}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -blue}
+{\it shades}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input, and applies dithering to it to reduce
+the number of colors used down to the specified number of shades for
+each primary.
+The default number of shades is red=5, green=9, blue=5, for
+a total of 225 colors.
+To convert the image to a binary rgb format 
+suitable for color printers, use -red 2 -green 2 -blue 2.
+The maximum
+number of colors that can be used is 256 and can be computed as the 
+product of the number of red, green and blue shades.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -dim}{\it \ dimension}
+}
+\item[{{\bf -dim}{\it \ dimension}
+}]
+The size of the dithering matrix.
+Must be a power of 2.
+\item[{{\bf -red}{\it \ shades}
+}]
+The number of red shades to be used; minimum of 2.
+\item[{{\bf -green}{\it \ shades}
+}]
+The number of green shades to be used; minimum of 2.
+\item[{{\bf -blue}{\it \ shades}
+}]
+The number of blue shades to be used; minimum of 2.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmdepth(1), ppmquant(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Christos Zoulas.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmdither.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:33:29 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmflash.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmflash.1
+%
+\phead{ppmflash}{1}{16 November 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmflash
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmflash - brighten a picture up to complete white-out
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmflash 
+{\it flashfactor}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input. Increases its brightness by
+the specified flashfactor up to a total white-out image.
+The flashfactor may be in the range from 0.0 (original picture's
+brightness) to 1.0 (full white-out, The Second After).
+\par
+As
+{\it pnmgamma}
+does not do the brightness correction in the way I
+wanted it, this small program was written.
+\par
+This program is similar to
+{\it ppmbrighten}
+, but not exactly the same.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), ppmdim(1), pnmgamma(1), ppmbrighten(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1993 by Frank Neumann
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmflash.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:46 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmforge.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmforge.1
+%
+\phead{ppmforge}{1}{25 October 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmforge
+%.IX fractals
+%.IX clouds
+%.IX planets
+%.IX stars
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmforge - fractal forgeries of clouds, planets, and starry skies
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\raggedright
+%.nh
+{\bf ppmforge}
+{\rm [}{\bf -clouds}{\rm ]}
+'in +9n
+{\rm [}{\bf -night}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -dimension}
+{\it dimen}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -hour}
+{\it hour}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -inclination$|$-tilt}
+{\it angle}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -mesh}
+{\it size}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -power}
+{\it factor}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -glaciers}
+{\it level}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -ice}
+{\it level}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -saturation}
+{\it sat}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -seed}
+{\it seed}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -stars}
+{\it fraction}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -xsize$|$-width}
+{\it width}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -ysize$|$-height}
+{\it height}{\rm ]}
+\ind{-4.5em}
+%.ad
+%.hy
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+{\bf ppmforge}
+generates three kinds of ``random fractal forgeries,'' the term coined
+by Richard F. Voss of the IBM Thomas J. Watson Research Center for
+seemingly realistic pictures of natural objects generated by simple
+algorithms embodying randomness and fractal self-similarity.  The
+techniques used by
+{\bf ppmforge}
+are essentially those
+given by Voss[1], particularly the technique of spectral synthesis
+explained in more detail by Dietmar Saupe[2].
+\par
+The program generates two varieties of pictures: planets and clouds,
+which are just different renderings of data generated in an identical
+manner, illustrating the unity of the fractal structure of these very
+different objects.  A third type of picture, a starry sky, is
+synthesised directly from pseudorandom numbers.
+\par
+The generation of planets or clouds begins with the preparation of an
+array of random data in the frequency domain.  The size of this
+array, the ``mesh size,'' can be set with the
+{\bf -mesh}
+option; the larger the mesh the more realistic the pictures but the
+calculation time and memory requirement increases as the square of the
+mesh size.  The fractal dimension, which you can specify with the
+{\bf -dimension}
+option, determines the roughness of the terrain on the planet or the
+scale of detail in the clouds.  As the fractal dimension is increased,
+more high frequency components are added into the random mesh.
+\par
+Once the mesh is generated, an inverse two dimensional Fourier
+transform is performed upon it.  This converts the original random
+frequency domain data into spatial amplitudes.  We scale the real
+components that result from the Fourier transform into numbers from 0
+to 1 associated with each point on the mesh.  You can further
+modify this number by applying a ``power law scale'' to it with the
+{\bf -power}
+option.   Unity scale
+leaves the numbers unmodified; a power scale of 0.5 takes the square
+root of the numbers in the mesh, while a power scale of 3 replaces the
+numbers in the mesh with their cubes.  Power law scaling is best
+envisioned by thinking of the data as representing the elevation of
+terrain; powers less than 1 yield landscapes with vertical scarps that
+look like glacially-carved valleys; powers greater than one make
+fairy-castle spires (which require large mesh sizes and high
+resolution for best results).
+\par
+After these calculations, we have a array of the specified size
+containing numbers that range from 0 to 1.  The pixmaps are generated as
+follows:
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf Clouds}}
+\item[{{\bf Clouds}}]
+A colour map is created that ranges from pure blue to white by
+increasing admixture (desaturation) of blue with white.  Numbers less
+than 0.5 are coloured blue, numbers between 0.5 and 1.0 are coloured
+with corresponding levels of white, with 1.0 being pure white.
+\item[{{\bf Planet}}]
+The mesh is projected onto a sphere.  Values less than 0.5 are treated
+as water and values between 0.5 and 1.0 as land.  The water areas are
+coloured based upon the water depth, and land based on its elevation.
+The random depth data are used to create clouds over the oceans.  An
+atmosphere approximately like the Earth's is simulated; its light
+absorption is calculated to create a blue cast around the limb of the
+planet.  A function that rises from 0 to 1 based on latitude is
+modulated by the local elevation to generate polar ice caps--high
+altitude terrain carries glaciers farther from the pole.  Based on the
+position of the star with respect to the observer, the apparent colour
+of each pixel of the planet is calculated by ray-tracing from the star
+to the planet to the observer and applying a lighting model that sums
+ambient light and diffuse reflection (for most planets ambient light
+is zero, as their primary star is the only source of illumination).
+Additional random data are used to generate stars around the planet.
+\item[{{\bf Night}}]
+A sequence of pseudorandom numbers is used to generate stars with a
+user specified density.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+Cloud pictures always contain 256 or fewer colours and may be
+displayed on most colour mapped devices without further processing.
+Planet pictures often contain tens of thousands of colours which
+must be compressed with
+{\bf ppmquant}
+or
+{\bf ppmdither}
+before encoding in a colour mapped format.  If the display resolution is
+high enough,
+{\bf ppmdither}
+generally produces better looking planets.
+{\bf ppmquant}
+tends to create discrete colour bands, particularly in the oceans,
+which are unrealistic and distracting.  The number of colours in starry
+sky pictures generated with the
+{\bf -night}
+option depends on the value specified for
+{\bf -saturation}{\rm .}
+Small values limit the colour temperature distribution of the stars
+and reduce the number of colours in the image.
+If the
+{\bf -saturation}
+is set to 0, none of the stars will be coloured and the resulting
+image will never contain more than 256 colours.
+Night sky pictures with many different star colours often look
+best when colour compressed by
+{\bf pnmdepth}
+rather than
+{\bf ppmquant}
+or
+{\bf ppmdither}{\rm .}
+Try
+{\it newmaxval}
+settings of 63, 31, or 15 with
+{\bf pnmdepth}
+to reduce the number of colours in the picture to 256 or fewer.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -clouds}}
+\item[{{\bf -clouds}}]
+Generate clouds.  A pixmap of fractal clouds is generated.  Selecting clouds
+sets the default for fractal dimension to 2.15 and power scale factor
+to 0.75.
+\item[{{\bf -dimension}{\it \ dimen}
+}]
+Sets the fractal dimension to the specified
+{\it dimen}{\rm ,}
+which may be any floating point value between 0 and 3.  Higher fractal
+dimensions create more ``chaotic'' images, which require higher
+resolution output and a larger FFT mesh size to look good.  If no
+dimension is specified, 2.4 is used when generating planets and 2.15
+for clouds.
+\item[{{\bf -glaciers}{\it \ level}
+}]
+The floating point
+{\it level}
+setting controls the extent to which terrain elevation causes ice to
+appear at lower latitudes.  The default value of 0.75 makes the polar
+caps extend toward the equator across high terrain and forms glaciers
+in the highest mountains, as on Earth.  Higher values make ice sheets
+that cover more and more of the land surface, simulating planets in the
+midst of an ice age.  Lower values tend to be boring, resulting in
+unrealistic geometrically-precise ice cap boundaries.
+\item[{{\bf -hour}{\it \ hour}
+}]
+When generating a planet,
+{\it hour}
+is used as the ``hour angle at the central meridian.''  If you specify
+{\bf -hour\ 12}{\rm ,}
+for example, the planet will be fully illuminated, corresponding to
+high noon at the longitude at the centre of the screen.  You can
+specify any floating point value between 0 and 24 for
+{\it hour}{\rm ,}
+but values which place most of the planet in darkness (0 to 4 and 20
+to 24) result in crescents which, while pretty, don't give you many
+illuminated pixels for the amount of computing that's required.  If no
+{\bf -hour}
+option is specified, a random hour angle is chosen, biased so that
+only 25\% of the images generated will be crescents.
+\item[{{\bf -ice}{\it \ level}
+}]
+Sets the extent of the polar ice caps to the given floating point
+{\it level}{\rm .}
+The default level of 0.4 produces ice caps similar to those of the Earth.
+Smaller values reduce the amount of ice, while larger
+{\bf -ice}
+settings create more prominent ice caps.  Sufficiently large values,
+such as 100 or more, in conjunction with small settings for
+{\bf -glaciers}
+(try 0.1) create ``ice balls'' like Europa.
+\item[{{\bf -inclination$|$-tilt}{\it \ angle}
+}]
+The inclination angle of the planet with regard to its primary star is
+set to
+{\it angle}{\rm ,}
+which can be any floating point value from -90 to 90.  The inclination
+angle can be thought of as specifying, in degrees, the ``season'' the
+planet is presently experiencing or, more precisely, the latitude at
+which the star transits the zenith at local noon.  If 0, the planet
+is at equinox; the star is directly overhead at the equator.
+Positive values represent summer in the northern hemisphere, negative
+values summer in the southern hemisphere.  The Earth's inclination
+angle, for example, is about 23.5 at the June solstice, 0 at the
+equinoxes in March and September, and -23.5 at the December solstice.
+If no inclination angle is specified, a random value between -21.6 and
+21.6 degrees is chosen.
+\item[{{\bf -mesh}{\it \ size}
+}]
+A mesh of
+{\it size}{\rm \ by\ }{\it size}
+will be used for the fast Fourier transform (FFT).  Note that memory
+requirements and computation speed increase as the square of
+{\it size}{\rm ;}
+if you double the mesh size, the program will use four times the
+memory and run four times as long.  The default mesh is 256x256, which
+produces reasonably good looking pictures while using half a megabyte
+for the 256x256 array of single precision complex numbers
+required by the FFT.  On machines with limited memory capacity, you
+may have to reduce the mesh size to avoid running out of RAM.
+Increasing the mesh size produces better looking pictures; the
+difference becomes particularly noticeable when generating high
+resolution images with relatively high fractal dimensions (between 2.2
+and 3).
+\item[{{\bf -night}}]
+A starry sky is generated.  The stars are created by the same algorithm
+used for the stars that surround planet pictures, but the output
+consists exclusively of stars.
+\item[{{\bf -power}{\it \ factor}
+}]
+Sets the ``power factor'' used to scale elevations synthesised from
+the FFT to
+{\it factor}{\rm ,}
+which can be any floating point number greater than zero.  If no
+factor is specified a default of 1.2 is used if a planet is being
+generated, or 0.75 if clouds are selected by the
+{\bf -clouds}
+option.  The result of the FFT image synthesis is an array of elevation
+values between 0 and 1.  A non-unity power factor exponentiates each
+of these elevations to the specified power.  For example, a power
+factor of 2 squares each value, while a power factor of 0.5 replaces
+each with its square root.  (Note that exponentiating values between 0
+and 1 yields values that remain within that range.)  Power factors
+less than 1 emphasise large-scale elevation changes at the expense of
+small variations.  Power factors greater than 1 increase the roughness
+of the terrain and, like high fractal dimensions, may require a larger
+FFT mesh size and/or higher screen resolution to look good.
+\item[{{\bf -saturation}{\it \ sat}
+}]
+Controls the degree of colour saturation of the stars that surround planet
+pictures and fill starry skies created with the
+{\bf -night}
+option.  The default value of 125 creates stars which resemble the sky
+as seen by the human eye from Earth's surface.  Stars are dim; only
+the brightest activate the cones in the human retina, causing colour
+to be perceived.  Higher values of
+{\it sat}
+approximate the appearance of stars from Earth orbit, where better
+dark adaptation, absence of skyglow, and the concentration of light
+from a given star onto a smaller area of the retina thanks to the lack
+of atmospheric turbulence enhances the perception of colour.  Values
+greater than 250 create ``science fiction'' skies that, while pretty,
+don't occur in this universe.
+\item[{\ }]
+Thanks to the inverse square law combined with Nature's love of
+mediocrity, there are many, many dim stars for every bright one.
+This population relationship is accurately reflected in the skies
+created by
+{\bf ppmforge}{\rm .}
+Dim, low mass stars live much longer than bright massive stars,
+consequently there are many reddish stars for every blue giant.  This
+relationship is preserved by
+{\bf ppmforge}{\rm .}
+You can reverse the proportion, simulating the sky as seen in a starburst
+galaxy, by specifying a negative
+{\it sat}
+value.
+\item[{{\bf -seed}{\it \ num}
+}]
+Sets the seed for the random number generator to the integer
+{\it num}{\rm .}
+The seed used to create each picture is displayed on standard output (unless
+suppressed with the
+{\bf -quiet}
+option).  Pictures generated with the same seed will be identical.  If no
+{\bf -seed}
+is specified, a random seed derived from the date and time will be
+chosen.  Specifying an explicit seed allows you to re-render a picture
+you particularly like at a higher resolution or with different viewing
+parameters.
+\item[{{\bf -stars}{\it \ fraction}
+}]
+Specifies the percentage of pixels, in tenths of a percent, which will
+appear as stars, either surrounding a planet or filling the entire
+frame if
+{\bf -night}
+is specified.  The default
+{\it fraction}
+is 100.
+\item[{{\bf -xsize$|$-width}{\it \ width}
+}]
+Sets the width of the generated image to
+{\it width}
+pixels.  The default width is 256 pixels.  Images must be at least as
+wide as they are high; if a width less than the height is specified,
+it will be increased to equal the height.  If you must have a long
+skinny pixmap, make a square one with
+{\bf ppmforge}{\rm ,}
+then use
+{\bf pnmcut}
+to extract a portion of the shape and size you require.
+\item[{{\bf -ysize$|$-height}{\it \ height}
+}]
+Sets the height of the generated image to
+{\it height}
+pixels.  The default height is 256 pixels.  If the height specified
+exceeds the width, the width will be increased to equal the height.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{BUGS}
+\par
+The algorithms require the output pixmap to be at least as wide as it
+is high, and the width to be an even number of pixels.  These
+constraints are enforced by increasing the size of the requested
+pixmap if necessary.
+\par
+You may have to reduce the FFT mesh size on machines with 16 bit
+integers and segmented pointer architectures.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+{\bf pnmcut}{\rm (1),}
+{\bf pnmdepth}{\rm (1),}
+{\bf ppmdither}{\rm (1),}
+{\bf ppmquant}{\rm (1),}
+{\bf ppm}{\rm (5)}
+\begin{TPlist}{[1] }
+\item[{[1] }]
+Voss, Richard F., ``Random Fractal Forgeries,'' in Earnshaw
+{\it et. al.}, Fundamental Algorithms for Computer Graphics, Berlin:
+Springer-Verlag, 1985.
+\item[{[2]}]
+Peitgen, H.-O., and Saupe, D. eds., The Science Of Fractal Images,
+New York: Springer Verlag, 1988.
+%.ne 10
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\ind{1\parindent}{\nofill
+    John Walker
+    Autodesk SA
+    Avenue des Champs-Montants 14b
+    CH-2074 MARIN
+    Suisse/Schweiz/Svizzera/Svizra/Switzerland
+\fill}
+\begin{TPlist}{Usenet:}
+\item[{Usenet:}]
+kelvin@Autodesk.com
+\item[{Fax:}]
+038/33 88 15
+\item[{Voice:}]
+038/33 76 33
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+without any conditions or restrictions.  This software is provided ``as
+is'' without express or implied warranty.
+\par
+{\bf PLUGWARE!}
+If you like this kind of stuff, you may also enjoy ``James Gleick's
+Chaos--The Software'' for MS-DOS, available for \$59.95 from your
+local software store or directly from Autodesk, Inc., Attn: Science
+Series, 2320 Marinship Way, Sausalito, CA 94965, USA.  Telephone:
+(800) 688-2344 toll-free or, outside the U.S. (415) 332-2344 Ext
+4886.  Fax: (415) 289-4718.  ``Chaos--The Software'' includes a more
+comprehensive fractal forgery generator which creates
+three-dimensional landscapes as well as clouds and planets, plus five
+more modules which explore other aspects of Chaos.  The user guide of
+more than 200 pages includes an introduction by James Gleick and
+detailed explanations by Rudy Rucker of the mathematics and algorithms
+used by each program.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmforge.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:47 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmhist.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmhist.1
+%
+\phead{ppmhist}{1}{03 April 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmhist
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmhist - print a histogram of a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmhist}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Generates a histogram of the colors in the pixmap.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), pgmhist(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmhist.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:48 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmmake.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmmake.1
+%
+\phead{ppmmake}{1}{24 September 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmmake
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmmake - create a pixmap of a specified size and color
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmmake}
+{\it color width height}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Produces a portable pixmap of the specified color, width, and height.
+%.IX "generating pixmaps"
+\par
+The color can be specified in five ways:
+%.IX "specifying colors"
+\begin{TPlist}{o}
+\item[{o}]
+A name, assuming
+that a pointer to an X11-style color names file was compiled in.
+\item[{o}]
+An X11-style hexadecimal specifier: rgb:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+each 1- to 4-digit hexadecimal numbers.
+\item[{o}]
+An X11-style decimal specifier: rgbi:r/g/b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+\item[{o}]
+For backwards compatibility, an old-X11-style hexadecimal
+number: \#rgb, \#rrggbb, \#rrrgggbbb, or \#rrrrggggbbbb.
+\item[{o}]
+For backwards compatibility, a triplet of numbers
+separated by commas: r,g,b, where r g and b are
+floating point numbers between 0 and 1.
+(This style was added before MIT came up with the similar rgbi style.)
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), pbmmake(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmmake.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:23:43 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmmix.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmmix.1
+%
+\phead{ppmmix}{1}{16 November 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmmix
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmmix - blend together two portable pixmaps
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmmix 
+{\it fadefactor}
+{\it ppmfile1 ppmfile2}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads two portable pixmaps as input. Mixes them together using the
+specified fade factor. The fade factor may be in the range from 0.0
+(only ppmfile1's image data) to 1.0 (only ppmfile2's image data).
+Anything in between gains a smooth blend between the two images.
+\par
+The two pixmaps must have the same size.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Frank Neumann.
+% Permission to use, , modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmmix.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:06 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmpat.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmpat.1
+%
+\phead{ppmpat}{1}{04 September 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmpat
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmpat - make a pretty pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmpat}
+{\bf -gingham2}{\rm $|$}{\bf -g2}{\rm $|$}{\bf -gingham3}{\rm $|$}
+{\bf -g3}{\rm $|$}{\bf -madras}{\rm $|$}{\bf -tartan}{\rm $|$}
+{\bf -poles}{\rm $|$}{\bf -squig}{\rm $|$}{\bf -camo}{\rm $|$}
+{\bf -anticamo}
+{\it width height}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Produces a portable pixmap of the specified width and height,
+with a pattern in it.
+%.IX "generating pixmaps"
+\par
+This program is mainly to demonstrate use of the ppmdraw routines, a
+simple but powerful drawing library.
+See the ppmdraw.h include file for more info on using these routines.
+Still, some of the patterns can be rather pretty.
+If you have a color workstation, something like
+{\bf ppmpat\ -squig\ 300\ 300 $|$ ppmquant\ 128}
+should generate a nice background.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\par
+The different flags specify various different pattern types:
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -gingham2}}
+\item[{{\bf -gingham2}}]
+A gingham check pattern.  Can be tiled.
+\item[{{\bf -gingham3}}]
+A slightly more complicated gingham.  Can be tiled.
+\item[{{\bf -madras}}]
+A madras plaid.  Can be tiled.
+\item[{{\bf -tartan}}]
+A tartan plaid.  Can be tiled.
+\item[{{\bf -poles}}]
+Color gradients centered on randomly-placed poles.
+May need to be run through
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -squig}}]
+Squiggley tubular pattern.  Can be tiled.
+May need to be run through
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -camo}}]
+Camouflage pattern.
+May need to be run through
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -anticamo}}]
+Anti-camouflage pattern - like -camo, but ultra-bright colors.
+May need to be run through
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm .}
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+Some of the patterns are from ``Designer's Guide to Color 3'' by Jeanne Allen.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtile(1), ppmquant(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmpat.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:48 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmquant.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmquant.1
+%
+\phead{ppmquant}{1}{12 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmquant
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmquant - quantize the colors in a portable pixmap down to a specified number
+
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmquant}
+{\rm [}{\bf -floyd}{\rm $|$}{\bf -fs}{\rm ]}
+{\it ncolors}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\nwl
+{\bf ppmquant}
+{\rm [}{\bf -floyd}{\rm $|$}{\bf -fs}{\rm ]}
+{\bf -map}
+{\it mapfile}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Chooses
+{\it ncolors}
+colors to best represent the image, maps the existing colors
+to the new ones, and writes a portable pixmap as output.
+%.IX "colormap reduction"
+\par
+The quantization method is Heckbert's ``median cut''.
+%.IX "median cut"
+\par
+Alternately, you can skip the color-choosing step by
+specifying your own set of colors with the
+{\bf -map}
+flag.  The
+{\it mapfile}
+is just a
+{\it ppm}
+file; it can be any shape, all that matters is the colors in it.
+For instance, to quantize down to the 8-color IBM TTL color set, you
+might use:
+{\tt\nofill
+    P3
+    8 1
+    255
+      0   0   0
+    255   0   0
+      0 255   0
+      0   0 255
+    255 255   0
+    255   0 255
+      0 255 255
+    255 255 255
+\fill}
+
+If you want to quantize one pixmap to use the colors in another one,
+just use the second one as the mapfile.
+You don't have to reduce it down to only one pixel of each color,
+just use it as is.
+\par
+The
+{\bf -floyd}{\rm /}{\bf -fs}
+flag enables a Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion step.
+%.IX Floyd-Steinberg
+%.IX "error diffusion"
+Floyd-Steinberg gives vastly better results on images where the unmodified
+quantization has banding or other artifacts, especially when going to a
+small number of colors such as the above IBM set.
+However, it does take substantially more CPU time, so the default is off.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+``Color Image Quantization for Frame Buffer Display'' by Paul Heckbert,
+SIGGRAPH '82 Proceedings, page 297.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmquantall(1), pnmdepth(1), ppmdither(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmquant.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:33:41 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmquantall.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmquantall.1
+%
+\phead{ppmquantall}{1}{27 July 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmquantall
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmquantall - run ppmquant on a bunch of files all at once, so they share a common colormap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmquantall}
+{\it ncolors ppmfile}
+{\rm ...}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Takes a bunch of portable pixmap as input.
+Chooses
+{\it ncolors}
+colors to best represent all of the images, maps the
+existing colors to the new ones, and
+{\bf overwrites the input files}
+with the new quantized versions.
+%.IX "colormap reduction"
+\par
+Verbose explanation: Let's say you've got a dozen pixmaps that you want
+to display on the screen all at the same time.  Your screen can only
+display 256 different colors, but the pixmaps have a total of a thousand
+or so different colors.  For a single pixmap you solve this problem with
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm ;}
+%.IX ppmquant
+this script solves it for multiple pixmaps.  All it does is
+concatenate them together into one big pixmap, run
+{\it ppmquant}
+on that, and then split it up into little pixmaps again.
+\par
+(Note that another way to solve this problem is to pre-select a set of
+colors and then use
+{\it ppmquant}{\rm 's}
+{\bf -map}
+option to separately quantize each pixmap to that set.)
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmquant(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+It's a csh script.
+Csh scripts are not portable to System V.
+Scripts in general are not portable to non-Unix environments.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmquantall.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:09 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmqvga.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmqvga.1
+%
+\phead{PPMQVGA}{1}{local}{}{}
+
+'% Heading: name(sect)    center (paren)    name(sect)
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmqvga - 8 plane quantization
+'% name [, name] ... \- brief description on a single line of \s-1INPUT\s+1
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmqvga [ options ] [ input file ]
+'% foo [ options ] files1 [ file2 [ ... ] ]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+{\bf ppmqvga}
+quantizes PPM files to 8 planes, with optional Floyd-Steinberg dithering.
+Input is a PPM file from the file named, or standard input of no file is
+provided.
+%.SS Options
+{\bf -d}
+dither. Apply Floyd-Steinberg dithering to the data
+
+{\bf -q}
+quiet. Produces no progress reporting, and no terminal output unless
+and error occurs.
+
+{\bf -v}
+verbose. Produces additional output describing the number of colors found,
+and some information on the resulting mapping. May be repeated to generate
+loads of internal table output, but generally only useful once.
+\shead{EXAMPLES}
+ppmqvga -d my\_image.ppm $|$ ppmtogif $>$my\_image.gif
+
+tgatoppm zombie.tga $|$ ppmqvga $|$ ppmtotif $>$ zombie.tif
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmquant
+\shead{DIAGNOSTICS}
+Error messages if problems, various levels of optional progress reporting.
+\shead{LIMITATIONS}
+none known.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Original by Lyle Rains (lrains@netcom.com) as ppmq256 and ppmq256fs
+combined, documented, and enhanced by Bill Davidsen (davidsen@crd.ge.com)
+\shead{Copyright}
+Copyright 1991,1992 by Bill Davidsen, all rights reserved.
+The program and documentation may be freely distributed by anyone in source
+or binary format. Please clearly note any changes.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmqvga.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:49 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmrelief.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmrelief.1
+%
+\phead{ppmrelief}{1}{11 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmrelief
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmrelief - run a Laplacian relief filter on a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmrelief}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Does a Laplacian relief filter, and writes a portable pixmap as output.
+%.IX "Laplacian relief"
+\par
+The Laplacian relief filter is described in ``Beyond Photography'' by Holzmann,
+equation 3.19.
+It's a sort of edge-detection.
+%.IX "edge detection"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmbentley(1), pgmoil(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Wilson Bent (whb@hoh-2.att.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmrelief.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:24:20 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmshift.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmshift.1
+%
+\phead{ppmshift}{1}{16 November 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmshift
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmshift - shift lines of a portable pixmap left or right by a random amount
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmshift 
+{\it shift}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input. Shifts every row of image data to the
+left or right by a certain amount. The 'shift' parameter determines by how 
+many pixels a row is to be shifted at most.
+\par
+Another one of those effects I intended to use for MPEG tests.
+Unfortunately, this program will not help me here - it creates too random
+patterns to be used for animations. Still, it might give interesting
+results on still images.
+\shead{EXAMPLE}
+Check this out: Save your favourite model's picture from something like
+alt.binaries.pictures.supermodels (ok, or from any other picture source),
+convert it to ppm, and process it e.g. like this, assuming the picture is 
+800x600 pixels:
+\nofill\ind{1\parindent}\tt{}  \# take the upper half, and leave it like it is
+  pnmcut 0 0 800 300 cs.ppm $>$upper.ppm
+
+  \# take the lower half, flip it upside down, dim it and distort it a little
+  pnmcut 0 300 800 300 cs.ppm $|$ pnmflip -tb $|$ ppmdim 0.7 $|$ 
+     ppmshift 10 $>$lower.ppm
+
+  \# and concatenate the two pieces
+  pnmcat -tb upper.ppm lower.ppm $>$newpic.ppm
+\fill 
+The resulting picture looks like the image being reflected on a water 
+surface with slight ripples.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), pnmcut(1), pnmflip(1), ppmdim(1), pnmcat(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Frank Neumann
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmshift.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Nov 29 13:24:10 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmspread.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmspread.1
+%
+\phead{ppmspread}{1}{16 November 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmspread
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmspread - displace a portable pixmap's pixels by a random amount
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmspread
+{\it amount}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input. Moves every pixel around a bit
+relative to its original position. amount determines by how many
+pixels a pixel is to be moved around at most.
+\par
+Pictures processed with this filter will seem to be somewhat 
+dissolved or unfocussed (although they appear more coarse than
+images processed by something like
+{\it pnmconvol}
+).
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), pnmconvol(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Frank Neumann
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty
+%
+% end of input file: ppmspread.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:50 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtoacad.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtoacad.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtoacad}{1}{10 October 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtoacad
+%.IX AutoCAD
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtoacad - convert portable pixmap to AutoCAD database or slide
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\raggedright
+{\bf ppmtoacad}
+'in 15n
+{\rm [}{\bf -dxb}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -poly}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -background}
+{\it colour}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -white}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -aspect}
+{\it ratio}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -8}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\ind{-7.5em}
+%.ad
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.  Produces an AutoCAD{l}ide file or
+binary database import (.dxb) file as output.
+If no
+{\it ppmfile}
+is specified, input is read from standard input.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -dxb}}
+\item[{{\bf -dxb}}]
+An AutoCAD binary database import (.dxb) file is written.  This file
+is read with the DXBIN command and, once loaded, becomes part of
+the AutoCAD geometrical database and can be viewed and edited like
+any other object.  Each sequence of identical pixels becomes a
+separate object in the database; this can result in very large AutoCAD
+drawing files.  However, if you want to trace over a bitmap, it lets
+you zoom and pan around the bitmap as you wish.
+\item[{{\bf -poly}}]
+If the
+{\bf -dxb}
+option is not specified, the output of
+{\bf ppmtoacad}
+is an AutoCAD slide file.  Normally each row of pixels is
+represented by an AutoCAD line entity.  If
+{\bf -poly}
+is selected, the pixels are rendered as filled polygons.  If the
+slide is viewed on a display with higher resolution than the source
+pixmap, this will cause the pixels to expand instead of appearing as
+discrete lines against the screen background colour.  Regrettably,
+this representation yields slide files which occupy more disc space
+and take longer to display.
+\item[{{\bf -background}{\it \ colour}
+}]
+Most AutoCAD display drivers can be configured to use any available
+colour as the screen background.  Some users perfer a black screen
+background, others white, while splinter groups advocate burnt ocher,
+tawny puce, and shocking grey.  Discarding pixels whose closest
+AutoCAD colour representation is equal to the background colour can
+substantially reduce the size of the AutoCAD database or slide file
+needed to represent a bitmap.  If no
+{\bf -background}
+colour is specified, the screen background colour is assumed to be
+black.  Any AutoCAD colour number may be specified as the screen
+background; colour numbers are assumed to specify the hues defined
+in the standard AutoCAD 256 colour palette.
+\item[{{\bf -white}}]
+Since many AutoCAD users choose a white screen background, this option
+is provided as a short-cut.  Specifying
+{\bf -white}
+is identical in effect to
+{\bf -background\ 7}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -aspect}{\it \ ratio}
+}]
+If the source pixmap had non-square pixels, the ratio of the pixel
+width to pixel height should be specified as
+{\it ratio}{\rm .}
+The resulting slide or .dxb file will be corrected so that pixels on
+the AutoCAD screen will be square.  For example, to correct an image made
+for a 320x200 VGA/MCGA screen, specify
+{\bf -aspect\ 0.8333}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -8}}]
+Restricts the colours in the output file to the 8 RGB shades.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{BUGS}
+AutoCAD has a fixed palette of 256 colours, distributed along the hue,
+lightness, and saturation axes.  Pixmaps which contain many
+nearly-identical colours, or colours not closely approximated by
+AutoCAD's palette, may be poorly rendered.
+\par
+{\bf ppmtoacad}
+works best if the system displaying its output supports the full 256
+colour AutoCAD palette.  Monochrome, 8 colour, and 16 colour
+configurations will produce less than optimal results.
+\par
+When creating a .dxb file or a slide file with the
+{\bf -poly}
+option,
+{\bf ppmtoacad}
+finds both vertical and horizontal runs of identical pixels and
+consolidates them into rectangular regions to reduce the size of the
+output file.  This is effective for images with large areas of
+constant colour but it's no substitute for true raster to vector
+conversion.  In particular, thin diagonal lines are not optimised at
+all by this process.
+\par
+Output files can be huge.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+AutoCAD Reference Manual:
+{\it Slide File Format}
+and
+{\it Binary\ Drawing\ Interchange\ (DXB)\ Files}{\rm ,}
+{\bf ppm}{\rm (5)}
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\ind{1\parindent}{\nofill
+    John Walker
+    Autodesk SA
+    Avenue des Champs-Montants 14b
+    CH-2074 MARIN
+    Suisse/Schweiz/Svizzera/Svizra/Switzerland
+\fill}
+\begin{TPlist}{Usenet:}
+\item[{Usenet:}]
+kelvin@Autodesk.com
+\item[{Fax:}]
+038/33 88 15
+\item[{Voice:}]
+038/33 76 33
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+without any conditions or restrictions.  This software is provided ``as
+is'' without express or implied warranty.
+\par
+AutoCAD and Autodesk are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtoacad.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:09 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtobmp.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtobmp.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtobmp}{1}{26 Oct 1992}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtobmp
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtobmp -- convert a portable pixmap into a BMP file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtobmp}
+{\rm [}{\it --windows}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it --os2}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a Microsoft Windows or OS/2 BMP file as output.
+%.IX BMP
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf --windows}}
+\item[{{\bf --windows}}]
+Tells the program to produce a Microsoft Windows BMP file.
+\item[{{\bf --os2}}]
+Tells the program to produce an OS/2 BMP file.
+(This is the default.)
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+bmptoppm(1),
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1992 by David W. Sanderson.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
+% its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
+% that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without
+% express or implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtobmp.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:50 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtogif.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtogif.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtogif}{1}{30 June 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtogif
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtogif - convert a portable pixmap into a GIF file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtogif}
+{\rm [}{\bf -interlace}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -sort}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -map}
+{\it mapfile ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a GIF file as output.
+%.IX GIF
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -interlace}}
+\item[{{\bf -interlace}}]
+Tells the program to produce an interlaced GIF file.
+\item[{{\bf -sort}}]
+Produces a GIF file with a sorted color map.
+\item[{{\bf -map}}]
+{\it mapfile}
+
+Uses the colors found in the
+{\it mapfile}
+to create the colormap in the GIF file, instead of the colors from
+{\it ppmfile.}
+The
+{\it mapfile}
+can be any
+{\it ppm}
+file; all that matters is the colors in it. If the colors in
+{\it ppmfile}
+do not match those in
+{\it mapfile}
+, they are matched to a ``best match''. A (much) better result can be obtained by
+using the following filter in advance:
+
+{\it ppmquant}
+-floyd -map
+{\it mapfile}
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+giftoppm(1), ppmquant(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Based on GIFENCOD by David Rowley (mgardi@watdcsu.waterloo.edu).
+Lempel-Ziv compression based on ``compress''.
+
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
+% CompuServe Incorporated.  GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
+% CompuServe Incorporated.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtogif.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:51 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtoicr.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtoicr.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtoicr}{1}{30 July 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtoicr
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtoicr - convert a portable pixmap into NCSA ICR format 
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtoicr}
+{\rm [}{\bf -windowname}
+{\it name}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -expand}
+{\it expand}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -display}
+{\it display}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rle}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap file as input.
+Produces an NCSA Telnet Interactive Color Raster graphic file as output.
+%.IX "NCSA ICR"
+If
+{\it ppmfile}
+is not supplied, 
+{\it ppmtoicr}
+will read from standard input.
+\par
+Interactive Color Raster (ICR) is a protocol for displaying raster
+graphics on workstation screens. The protocol is implemented in NCSA
+Telnet for the Macintosh version 2.3.
+%.IX Macintosh
+The ICR protocol shares
+characteristics of the Tektronix graphics terminal emulation protocol.
+%.IX Tektronix
+For example, escape sequences are used to control the display.
+\par
+{\it ppmtoicr}
+will output the appropriate sequences to create a window of the
+dimensions of the input pixmap,
+create a colormap of up to 256
+colors on the display, then load the picture data into the window.
+\par
+Note that there is no icrtoppm tool - this transformation is one way.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -windowname}{\it name}
+}
+\item[{{\bf -windowname}{\it name}
+}]
+Output will be displayed in
+{\it name}
+(Default is to use
+{\it ppmfile}
+or ``untitled'' if standard input is read.)
+\item[{{\bf -expand}{\it expand}
+}]
+Output will be expanded on display by factor 
+{\it expand}
+(For example, a value of 2 will cause four pixels to be displayed for
+every input pixel.)
+\item[{{\bf -display}{\it display}
+}]
+Output will be displayed on screen numbered 
+{\it display}
+\item[{{\bf -rle}}]
+Use run-length encoded format for display. (This will nearly always
+result in a quicker display, but may skew the colormap.)
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{EXAMPLES}
+To display a
+{\it ppm}
+file using the protocol:
+\nofill
+    ppmtoicr ppmfile
+\fill
+This will create a window named 
+{\it ppmfile}
+on the display with the correct dimensions for
+{\it ppmfile,}
+create and download a colormap of up
+to 256 colors, and download the picture into the window. The same effect
+may be achieved by the following sequence:
+\nofill
+    ppmtoicr ppmfile $>$ filename
+    cat filename
+\fill
+To display a GIF 
+file using the protocol in a window titled after the input file, zoom
+the displayed image by a factor of 2, and
+run-length encode the data:
+\nofill
+    giftoppm giffile $|$ ppmtoicr -w giffile -r -e 2
+\fill
+\shead{BUGS}
+\par
+The protocol uses frequent 
+{\it fflush}
+calls to speed up display. If the
+output is saved to a file for later display via
+{\it cat,}
+drawing will be
+much slower. In either case, increasing the Blocksize limit on the
+display will speed up transmission substantially.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+{\bf ppm(5)}
+\par\noindent
+{\it NCSA\ Telnet\ for\ the\ Macintosh}{\rm ,}
+University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign (1989)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Kanthan Pillay (svpillay@Princeton.EDU),
+Princeton University Computing and Information Technology.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtoicr.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:52 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtoilbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtoilbm.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtoilbm}{1}{29 August 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtoilbm
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtoilbm - convert a portable pixmap into an ILBM file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtoilbm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -maxplanes}{\rm $|$}{\bf -mp}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -fixplanes}{\rm $|$}{\bf -fp}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -ham6}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ham8}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -dcbits}{\rm $|$}{\bf -dcplanes}{\rm r}{\bf g}{\rm b}{\bf ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -normal}{\rm $|$}{\bf -hamif}{\rm $|$}{\bf -hamforce}{\rm $|$}{\bf -24if}{\rm $|$}{\bf -24force}{\rm $|$}
+{\rm -dcif}{\bf $|$}{\rm -dcforce}{\bf $|$}{\rm -cmaponly}{\bf ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -ecs}{\rm $|$}{\bf -aga}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -map}{\rm ppmfile}{\bf ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+%.IX "ILBM"
+Produces an ILBM file as output.
+Supported ILBM types are:
+\begin{TPlist}{Normal ILBMs with 1-16 planes.}
+\item[{Normal ILBMs with 1-16 planes.}]
+\item[{Amiga Hold-and-Modify (HAM) with 3-16 planes.}]
+%.IX "Amiga"
+%.IX "HAM"
+\item[{24 bit.}]
+\item[{Color map (BMHD + CMAP chunk only, nPlanes = 0).}]
+\item[{Unofficial direct color.}]
+1-16 planes for each color component.
+\item[{Chunks written:}]
+BMHD, CMAP, CAMG (only for HAM), BODY (not for colormap files)
+unofficial DCOL chunk for direct color ILBM
+\item[{Chunks ignored:}]
+GRAB, DEST, SPRT, CRNG, CCRT, CLUT, DPPV, DRNG, EPSF
+\item[{Other chunks (ignored but displayed in verbose mode):}]
+NAME, AUTH, (c), ANNO, DPI
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+Options marked with (*) can be prefixed with a ``no'',
+{\it e.g.}, ``-nohamif''. All options can be abbreviated to
+their shortest unique prefix.
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -maxplanes $|$ -mp n}}
+\item[{{\bf -maxplanes $|$ -mp n}}]
+(default 5, minimum 1, maximum 16)
+Maximum planes to write in a normal ILBM.  If the pixmap
+does not fit into $<$n$>$ planes, ppmtoilbm writes a HAM file
+(if -hamif is used), a 24bit file (if -24if is used) or a
+direct color file (if -dcif is used) or aborts with an error.
+\item[{{\bf -fixplanes $|$ -fp n}}]
+(min 1, max 16)
+If a normal ILBM is written, it will have exactly $<$n$>$ planes.
+\item[{{\bf -hambits $|$ -hamplanes n}}]
+(default 6, min 3, max 16)
+Select number of planes for HAM picture.  The current Amiga
+hardware supports 6 and 8 planes, so for now you should
+only use this values.
+\item[{{\bf -normal (default)}}]
+Turns off -hamif/-24if/-dcif, -hamforce/-24force/-dcforce and
+-cmaponly.
+\item[{{\bf -hamif (*)}}]
+\item[{{\bf -24if (*)}}]
+\item[{{\bf -dcif (*)}}]
+Write a HAM/24bit/direct color file if the pixmap does not
+fit into $<$maxplanes$>$ planes.
+\item[{{\bf -hamforce (*)}}]
+\item[{{\bf -24force (*)}}]
+\item[{{\bf -dcforce (*)}}]
+Write a HAM/24bit/direct color file.
+\item[{{\bf -dcbits $|$ -dcplanes r g b}}]
+(default 5, min 1, max 16).
+Select number of bits for red, green \& blue in a direct
+color ILBM.
+\item[{{\bf -ecs (default)}}]
+Shortcut for: -hamplanes 6 -maxplanes 5
+\item[{{\bf -aga}}]
+\item[{{\bf Shortcut for: -hamplanes 8 -maxplanes 8}}]
+\item[{{\bf -ham6}}]
+\item[{{\bf Shortcut for: -hamplanes 6 -hamforce}}]
+\item[{{\bf -ham8}}]
+Shortcut for: -hamplanes 8 -hamforce
+\item[{{\bf -map ppmfile}}]
+Write a normal ILBM using the colors in $<$ppmfile$>$ as the
+colormap. The colormap file also determines the number of
+planes, a -maxplanes or -fixplanes option is ignored.
+\item[{{\bf -cmaponly}}]
+Write a colormap file: only BMHD and CMAP chunks, no BODY
+chunk, nPlanes = 0.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+Needs a real colormap selection algorithm for HAM pictures,
+instead of using a grayscale colormap.
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual - Devices (3rd Ed.)
+Addison Wesley, ISBN 0--201--56775--X
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), ilbmtoppm(1)
+\shead{AUTHORS}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+\nwl
+Modified August 1993 by Ingo Wilken
+(Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtoilbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Tue Nov 30 08:30:37 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtomitsu.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtomitsu.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtomitsu}{1}{29 Jan 1992}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtomitsu
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtomitsu - convert a portable pixmap to a Mitsubishi S340-10 file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtomitsu}
+{\rm [-sharpness}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -enlarge}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -media}
+{\it string}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -copy}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -dpi300}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -tiny}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input and converts it into a format suitable
+to be printed by a Mitsubishi S340-10 printer, or any other Mitsubishi
+color sublimation printer.
+\par
+The Mitsubishi S340-10 Color Sublimation printer supports 24bit color.
+Images of the available sizes take so long to transfer that there is a
+fast method, employing a lookuptable, that ppmtomitsu will use if there
+is a maximum of 256 colors in the pixmap.
+ppmtomitsu will try to position your image to the center of the paper,
+and will rotate your image for you if xsize is larger than ysize.
+If your image is larger than the media allows, ppmtomitsu will quit
+with an error message. (We decided that the media were too expensive
+to have careless users produce misprints.) 
+Once data transmission has started, the job can't be stopped in a
+sane way without resetting the printer.
+The printer understands putting together images in the printers memory;
+ppmtomitsu doesn't utilize this as pnmcat etc provide the same functionality
+and let you view the result on-screen, too.
+The S340-10 is the lowest common denominator printer; for higher
+resolution printers there's the dpi300 option. The other printers also
+support higher values for enlarge eg, but I don't think that's essential
+enough to warrant a change in the program.
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -sharpness}{\it \ 1-4}
+}
+\item[{{\bf -sharpness}{\it \ 1-4}
+}]
+ 'sharpness' designation. Default is to use the current sharpness.
+\item[{{\bf -enlarge}{\it \ 1-3}
+}]
+Enlarge by a factor; Default is 1 (no enlarge)
+\item[{{\bf -media}{\it \ A,\ A4,\ AS,\ A4S}
+}]
+Designate the media you're using. Default is 1184 x 1350, which will fit
+on any media. A is 1216 x 1350, A4 is 1184 x 1452, AS is 1216 x 1650 and 
+A4S is 1184 x 1754. A warning: If you specify a different media than the
+printer currently has, the printer will wait until you put in the correct
+media or switch it off.
+\item[{{\bf -copy}{\it \ 1-9}
+}]
+The number of copies to produce. Default is 1.
+\item[{{\bf -dpi300}
+}]
+Double the number of allowed pixels for a S3600-30 Printer in S340-10
+compatibility mode. (The S3600-30 has 300 dpi).
+\item[{{\bf -tiny}
+}]
+Memory-safing, but always slow. The printer will get the data line-by-line
+in 24bit. It's probably a good idea to use this if your machine starts
+paging a lot without this option.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+Mitsubishi Sublimation Full Color Printer S340-10 Specifications of
+Parallel Interface LSP-F0232F
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmquant(1), pnmscale(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+We didn't find any - yet. (Besides, they're called features anyway :-)
+If you should find one, my email-adress is below.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1992, 93 by S.Petra Zeidler, MPIfR Bonn, Germany.
+(spz@specklec.mpifr-bonn.mpg.de)
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtomitsu.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:10 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtomap.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtomap.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtomap}{1}{11 August 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtomap
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtomap - extract all colors from a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtomap}
+{\rm [}{\bf -sort}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -square}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a portable pixmap as output, representing a color map of the
+input file. All N different colors found are put in an Nx1 portable
+pixmap.
+This color map file can be used as a mapfile for
+{\it ppmquant}
+or
+{\it ppmtogif.}
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -sort}}
+\item[{{\bf -sort}}]
+Produces a portable pixmap with the colors in some sorted order.
+\item[{{\bf -square}}]
+Produces a (more or less) square output file, instead of putting all
+colors on the top row.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{WARNING}
+If you want to use the output file as a mapfile for
+{\it ppmtogif,}
+you first have to do a
+{\it ppmquant 256,}
+since
+{\it ppmtomap}
+is not limited to 256 colors (but to 65536).
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtogif(1), ppmquant(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Marcel Wijkstra (wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl).
+
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
+% CompuServe Incorporated.  GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
+% CompuServe Incorporated.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtomap.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:53 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopcx.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopcx.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopcx}{1}{09 April 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtopcx
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopcx - convert a portable pixmap into a PCX file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtopcx}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a PCX file as output.
+%.IX PCX
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pcxtoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Michael Davidson.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopcx.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:53 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopgm.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopgm}{1}{23 December 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopgm - convert a portable pixmap into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtopgm}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+The quantization formula used is .299 r + .587 g + .114 b.
+\par
+Note that although there is a
+{\it pgmtoppm}
+program, it is not necessary
+for simple conversions from
+{\it pgm}
+to
+{\it ppm}{\rm ,}
+because any ppm program can
+read
+{\it pgm}
+(and
+{\it pbm}
+) files automagically.
+{\it pgmtoppm}
+is for colorizing a
+{\it pgm}
+file.  Also, see
+{\it ppmtorgb3}
+%.IX ppmtorgb3
+for a different way of converting color to gray.
+\shead{QUOTE}
+\nofill
+Cold-hearted orb that rules the night
+Removes the colors from our sight
+Red is gray, and yellow white
+But we decide which is right
+And which is a quantization error.
+\fill
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgmtoppm(1), ppmtorgb3(1), rgb3toppm(1), ppm(5), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:54 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopi1.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopi1.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopi1}{1}{19 July 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtopi1
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopi1 - convert a portable pixmap into an Atari Degas .pi1 file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtopi1}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces an Atari Degas .pi1 file as output.
+%.IX Atari
+%.IX "Degas .pi1"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pi1toppm(1), ppm(5), pbmtopi3(1), pi3topbm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Steve Belczyk (seb3@gte.com) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopi1.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:54 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopict.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopict.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopict}{1}{15 April 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtopict
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopict - convert a portable pixmap into a Macintosh PICT file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtopict}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a Macintosh PICT file as output.
+%.IX PICT
+%.IX Macintosh
+\par
+The generated file is only the data fork of a picture.
+You will need a program such as
+{\it mcvert}
+to generate a Macbinary or a BinHex file that contains the necessary
+information to identify the file as a PICT file to MacOS.
+\par
+Even though PICT supports 2 and 4 bits per pixel,
+{\it ppmtopict}
+always generates an 8 bits per pixel file.
+\shead{BUGS}
+The picture size field is only correct if the output is to a file
+since writing into this field requires seeking backwards on a file.
+However the PICT documentation seems to suggest that this field is
+not critical anyway since it is only the lower 16 bits of the picture size.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+picttoppm(1), ppm(5), mcvert(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Ken Yap (ken@cs.rocester.edu).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopict.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:55 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopj.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopj.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopj}{1}{13 July 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtopj
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopj - convert a portable pixmap to an HP PaintJet file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtopj}
+{\rm [-gamma}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -xpos}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -ypos}
+{\it val}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -back}
+{\bf dark}{\rm $|$}{\bf lite}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rle}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -center}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -render}
+{\bf none$|$snap$|$bw$|$dither$|$diffuse$|$monodither$|$monodiffuse$|$clusterdither$|$monoclusterdither}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input and converts it into a format suitable
+to be printed by an HP PaintJet printer.
+\par
+For best results, the input file should be in 8-color RGB form;
+{\it i.e.}, it should have only
+the 8 binary combinations of full-on and full-off primaries.
+You could get this by sending the input file through
+{\it ppmquant -map}
+with a map file such as:
+\nofill
+    P3
+    8 1
+    255
+    0 0 0      255 0 0    0 255 0    0 0 255
+    255 255 0  255 0 255  0 255 255  255 255 255
+\fill
+Or else you could use use
+{\it ppmdither -red 2 -green 2 -blue 2.}
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -rle}}
+\item[{{\bf -rle}}]
+Run length encode the image.
+(This can result in larger images)
+\item[{{\bf -back}}]
+Enhance the foreground by indicating if the background is light or
+dark compated to the foreground.
+\item[{{\bf -render}{\it \ alg}
+}]
+Use an internal rendering algorithm (default dither).
+\item[{{\bf -gamma}{\it \ int}
+}]
+Gamma correct the image using the integet parameter as a gamma (default 0).
+\item[{{\bf -center}}]
+Center the image to an 8.5 by 11 page
+\item[{{\bf -xpos}{\it \ pos}
+}]
+Move by pos pixels in the x direction.
+\item[{{\bf -ypos}{\it \ pos}
+}]
+Move by pos pixels in the y direction.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{REFERENCES}
+HP PaintJet XL Color Graphics Printer User's Guide
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmdepth(1), ppmquant(1), ppmdither(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+Most of the options have not been tested because of the price of the paper.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Christos Zoulas.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopj.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:10 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopjxl.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopjxl.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopjxl}{1}{14 March 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopjxl - convert a portable pixmap into an HP PaintJet XL PCL file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmtopjxl [-nopack] [-gamma
+{\it $<$n$>$}
+] [-presentation] [-dark] [-diffuse] [-cluster] [-dither] [-xshift
+{\it $<$s$>$}
+] [-yshift
+{\it $<$s$>$}
+] [-xshift
+{\it $<$s$>$}
+] [-yshift
+{\it $<$s$>$}
+] [-xsize$|$-width$|$-xscale
+{\it $<$s$>$}
+] [-ysize$|$-height$|$-yscale
+{\it $<$s$>$}
+] [ppmfile]
+
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a PCL file suitable for printing on an HP PaintJet XL printer as
+output.
+\par
+The generated file is not suitable for printing on a normal PrintJet printer.
+The
+{\bf --nopack}
+option generates a file which does not use the normal TIFF 4.0 compression
+method. This file might be printable on a normal PaintJet printer (not an XL).
+\par
+The
+{\bf --gamma}
+option sets the gamma correction for the image. The useful range for the
+PaintJet XL is approximately 0.6 to 1.5.
+\par
+The rendering algorithm used for images can be altered with the
+{\bf -dither,}
+{\bf -cluster,}
+and
+{\bf -diffuse}
+options. These options select ordered dithering, clustered ordered dithering,
+or error diffusion respectively.
+The
+{\bf --dark}
+option can be used to enhance images with a dark background when they are
+reduced in size.
+The
+{\bf --presentation}
+option turns on presentation mode, in which two passes are made over the paper
+to increase ink density. This should be used only for images where quality is
+critical.
+
+\par
+The image can be resized by setting the 
+{\bf --xsize}
+and 
+{\bf --ysize}
+options. The parameter to either of these options is interpreted as the
+number of dots to set the width or height to, but an optional dimension of
+`%
+\bf pt%
+\rm ' (points), `%
+\bf dp%
+\rm ' (decipoints), `%
+\bf in%
+\rm ' (inches), or
+`%
+\bf cm%
+\rm ' (centimetres) may be appended.
+If only one dimension is specified, the other will be scaled appropriately.
+
+The options
+{\bf --width}
+and
+{\bf --height}
+are synonyms of
+{\bf --xsize}
+and
+{\bf --ysize.}
+
+The
+{\bf --xscale}
+and
+{\bf --yscale}
+options can alternatively be used to scale the image by a simple factor.
+
+\par
+The image can be shifted on the page by using the
+{\bf --xshift}
+and
+{\bf --yshift}
+options. These move the image the specified dimensions right and down.
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Angus Duggan
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopjxl.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:56 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtopuzz.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtopuzz.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtopuzz}{1}{22 August 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtopuzz
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtopuzz - convert a portable pixmap into an X11 ``puzzle'' file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtopuzz}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces an X11 ``puzzle'' file as output.
+A ``puzzle'' file is for use with the
+{\it puzzle}
+%.IX puzzle
+%.IX "X window system"
+program included with the X11 distribution -
+{\it puzzle}{\rm 's}
+{\bf -picture}
+flag lets you specify an image file.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), puzzle(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtopuzz.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:57 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtorgb3.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtorgb3.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtorgb3}{1}{10 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtorgb3
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtorgb3 - separate a portable pixmap into three portable graymaps
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtorgb3}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Writes three portable graymaps as output, one each for red, green, and blue.
+%.IX "color separation"
+\par
+The output filenames are constructed by taking the input filename,
+stripping off any extension, and appending ``.red'', ``.grn'', and
+``.blu''.
+For example, separating lenna.ppm would result in lenna.red, lenna.grn,
+and lenna.blu.
+If the input comes from stdin, the names are noname.red, noname.grn,
+and noname.blu.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+rgb3toppm(1), ppmtopgm(1), pgmtoppm(1), ppm(5), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtorgb3.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:57 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtosixel.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtosixel.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtosixel}{1}{26 April 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtosixel
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtosixel - convert a portable pixmap into DEC sixel format
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtosixel}
+{\rm [}{\bf -raw}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -margin}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces sixel commands (SIX) as output.
+The output is formatted for color printing, {\it e.g.}, for a DEC LJ250 color
+inkjet printer. 
+\par
+If RGB values from the PPM file do not have maxval=100,
+the RGB values are rescaled.
+A printer control header and a color assignment table begin the SIX file.
+Image data is written in a compressed format by default.
+A printer control footer ends the image file.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -raw}}
+\item[{{\bf -raw}}]
+If specified, each pixel will be explicitly described in the image file.
+If
+{\bf -raw}
+is not specified, output will default to compressed format in which
+identical adjacent pixels are replaced by ``repeat pixel'' commands.
+A raw file is often an order of magnitude larger than a compressed
+file and prints much slower.
+\item[{{\bf -margin}}]
+If
+{\bf -margin}
+is not specified, the image will be start at the left margin
+(of the window, paper, or whatever).
+If
+{\bf -margin}
+is specified, a 1.5 inch left margin will offset the image.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{PRINTING}
+Generally, sixel files must reach the printer unfiltered.
+Use the lpr -x option or cat filename $>$ /dev/tty0?.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Upon rescaling, truncation of the least significant bits of RGB values
+may result in poor color conversion.
+If the original PPM maxval was greater than 100, rescaling also
+reduces the image depth.
+While the actual RGB values from the ppm file are more or less
+retained, the color palette of the LJ250 may not match the colors
+on your screen.
+This seems to be a printer limitation.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Rick Vinci.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtosixel.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:58 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtotga.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtotga.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtotga}{1}{28 October 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtotga
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtotga - convert portable pixmap into a TrueVision Targa file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtotga}
+{\rm [}{\bf -mono$|$-cmap$|$-rgb}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -norle}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a TrueVision Targa file as output.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -mono}}
+\item[{{\bf -mono}}]
+Forces Targa file to be of type 8 bit monochrome.  Input must be a portable
+bitmap or a portable graymap.
+\item[{{\bf -cmap}}]
+Forces Targa file to be of type 24 bit colormapped.  Input must be a portable
+bitmap, a portable graymap or a portable pixmap containing no more than
+256 distinct colors.
+\item[{{\bf -rgb}}]
+Forces Targa file to be of type 24 bit unmapped color.
+\item[{{\bf -norle}}]
+Disables run-length encoding, in case you have a Targa reader which
+can't read run-length encoded files.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.  If no
+file type is specified the most highly constained compatible type is
+used, where monochrome is more constained than colormapped which is in
+turn more constained than unmapped.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Does not support all possible Targa file types.
+Should really be in PNM, not PPM.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+tgatoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Mark Shand and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtotga.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:59 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtouil.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtouil.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtouil}{1}{31 August 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtouil
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtouil - convert a portable pixmap into a Motif UIL icon file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtouil}
+{\rm [}{\bf -name}
+{\it uilname}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces a Motif UIL icon file as output.
+%.IX Motif
+%.IX UIL
+%.IX "X window system"
+\par
+If the program was compiled with an rgb database specified, and
+a RGB value from the ppm input matches a RGB value from the database,
+then the corresponding color name mnemonic is printed in the UIL's colormap.
+If no rgb database was compiled in, or if the RGB values don't match,
+then the color
+will be printed with the \#RGB, \#RRGGBB, \#RRRGGGBBB, or \#RRRRGGGGBBBB
+hexadecimal format.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -name}}
+\item[{{\bf -name}}]
+Allows you to specify the prefix string which is printed
+in the resulting UIL output.  If not specified, will default to the
+filename (without extension) of the ppmfile argument.
+If
+{\bf -name}
+is not specified and no ppmfile
+is specified ({\it i.e.}, piped input), the prefix string will default to
+the string ``noname''.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Converted by Jef Poskanzer from ppmtoxpm.c, which is
+\copyright 1990 by Mark W. Snitily.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtouil.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:59 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtoxpm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtoxpm.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtoxpm}{1}{Tue Apr 9 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtoxpm - convert a portable pixmap into an X11 pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+ppmtoxpm [-name $<$xpmname$>$] [-rgb $<$rgb-textfile$>$] [$<$ppmfile$>$]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces X11 pixmap  (version 3) as output which
+can be loaded directly by the XPM library.
+\par
+The {\bf -nameoption} allows one to specify the prefix string which is printed
+in the resulting XPM output.  If not specified, will default to the
+filename (without extension) of the $<$ppmfile$>$ argument.
+If {\bf -nameis} not specified and $<$ppmfile$>$
+is not specified ({\it i.e.}, piped input), the prefix string will default to
+the string ``noname''.
+\par
+The {\bf -rgboption} allows one to specify an X11 rgb text file for the
+lookup of color name mnemonics.  This rgb text file is typically the
+/usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt of the MIT X11 distribution, but any file using the
+same format may be used.  When specified and
+a RGB value from the ppm input matches a RGB value from the $<$rgb-textfile$>$,
+then the corresponding color name mnemonic is printed in the XPM's colormap.
+If {\bf -rgbis} not specified, or if the RGB values don't match, then the color
+will be printed with the \#RGB, \#RRGGBB, \#RRRGGGBBB, or \#RRRRGGGGBBBB
+hexadecimal format.
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\par
+For example, to convert the file ``dot'' (found in /usr/include/X11/bitmaps),
+from xbm to xpm one could specify
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{}}
+xbmtopbm dot $|$ ppmtoxpm -name dot
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\par
+or, with a rgb text file (in the local directory)
+\begin{IPlist}
+\IPitem{{}}
+xbmtopbm dot $|$ ppmtoxpm -name dot -rgb rgb.txt
+\end{IPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+An option to match the closest (rather than exact) color name mnemonic
+from the rgb text would be a desirable enhancement.
+\par
+Truncation of the least significant bits of a RGB value may result in
+nonexact matches when performing color name mnemonic lookups.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\nwl
+XPM Manual by Arnaud Le Hors (lehors@mirsa.inria.fr).
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1990 by Mark W. Snitily.
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+implied warranty.
+
+This tool was developed for Schlumberger Technologies, ATE Division, and
+with their permission is being made available to the public with the above
+copyright notice and permission notice.
+
+Upgraded to XPM2 by
+   Paul Breslaw, Mecasoft SA, Zurich, Switzerland (paul@mecazh.uu.ch)
+   Thu Nov  8 16:01:17 1990
+
+Upgraded to XPM version 3 by
+   Arnaud Le Hors (lehors@mirsa.inria.fr)
+   Tue Apr 9 1991
+
+
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtoxpm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:00 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtoyuv.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtoyuv.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtoyuv}{1}{25 March 91}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtoyuv
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtoyuv - convert a portable pixmap into an Abekas YUV file
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtoyuv}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces an Abekas YUV file as output.
+%.IX Abekas
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+yuvtoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Marc Boucher (marc@PostImage.COM),
+based on Example Conversion Program, A60/A64 Digital Video Interface
+Manual, page 69.
+\par
+\copyright 1991 by DHD PostImage Inc.
+\par
+\copyright 1987 by Abekas Video Systems Inc.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtoyuv.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:11 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ppmtoyuvsplit.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ppmtoyuvsplit.1
+%
+\phead{ppmtoyuvsplit}{1}{9 September 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX ppmtoyuvsplit
+\shead{NAME}
+ppmtoyuvsplit - convert a portable pixmap into 3 subsampled raw YUV files
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ppmtoyuvsplit}
+{\it basename}
+{\rm [}{\it ppmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a portable pixmap as input.
+Produces 3 raw files basename.Y, basename.U and basename.V as output.
+These files are the subsampled raw YUV representation of the input
+pixmap, as required by the Stanford MPEG codec. The subsampling is done
+by arithmetic mean of 4 pixels colors into one. The YUV values are scaled
+according to CCIR.601, as assumed by MPEG.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+mpeg(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Andre Beck. (Andre\_Beck@IRS.Inf.TU-Dresden.de).
+\par
+Based on ppmtoyuv.c.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ppmtoyuvsplit.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:33 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: psidtopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: psidtopgm.1
+%
+\phead{psidtopgm}{1}{02 August 89}{}{}
+
+%.IX psidtopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+psidtopgm - convert PostScript ``image'' data into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf psidtopgm}
+{\it width height bits/sample}
+{\rm [}{\it imagedata}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads the ``image'' data from a PostScript file as input.
+%.IX PostScript
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+\par
+This is a very simple and limited program, and is here only because
+so many people have asked for it.
+To use it you have to
+{\bf manually}
+extract the readhexstring data portion from your PostScript file, and then
+give the width, height, and bits/sample on the command line.
+Before you attempt this, you should
+{\bf at least}
+read the description of the ``image'' operator in the PostScript Language
+Reference Manual.
+\par
+It would probably not be too hard to write a script that uses this filter
+to read a specific variety of PostScript image, but the variation is too
+great to make a general-purpose reader.
+Unless, of course, you want to write a full-fledged PostScript interpreter...
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtops(1), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: psidtopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:00 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: qrttoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: qrttoppm.1
+%
+\phead{qrttoppm}{1}{25 August 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX qrttoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+qrttoppm - convert output from the QRT ray tracer into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf qrttoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it qrtfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a QRT file as input.
+%.IX "QRT raytracer"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: qrttoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:28 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: rasttopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: rasttopnm.1
+%
+\phead{rasttopnm}{1}{13 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX rasttopnm
+\shead{NAME}
+rasttopnm - convert a Sun rasterfile into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf rasttopnm}
+{\rm [}{\it rastfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Sun rasterfile as input.
+%.IX Sun
+%.IX rasterfile
+Produces a portable anymap as output.
+The type of the output file depends on the input file - if it's
+black \& white, a
+{\it pbm}
+file is written, else if it's grayscale a
+{\it pgm}
+file, else a
+{\it ppm}
+file.  The program tells you which type it is writing.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtorast(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: rasttopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:34 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: rawtopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: rawtopgm.1
+%
+\phead{rawtopgm}{1}{15 June 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX rawtopgm
+\shead{NAME}
+rawtopgm - convert raw grayscale bytes into a portable graymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf rawtopgm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -headerskip}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rowskip}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -tb}{\rm $|$}{\bf -topbottom}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it width}
+{\it height}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it imagedata}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads raw grayscale bytes as input.
+%.IX "raw grayscale"
+Produces a portable graymap as output.
+The input file is just grayscale bytes.
+If you don't specify the width and height on the command line,
+the program will check the size of the image and try to make
+a quadratic image of it. It is an error to supply a non
+quadratic image without specifying width and height.
+The maxval is assumed to be 255.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -headerskip}}
+\item[{{\bf -headerskip}}]
+If the file has a header, you can use this flag to
+skip over it.
+\item[{{\bf -rowskip}}]
+If there is padding at the ends of the rows, you can skip it with this flag.
+Note that rowskip can be a real number.
+Amazingly, I once had an image with 0.376 bytes of padding per row.
+This turned out to be due to a file-transfer problem, but I was still
+able to read the image.
+\item[{{\bf -tb -topbottom}}]
+Flips the image upside down.
+The first pixel in a pgm file is in the lower left corner of the image.
+For conversion from images with the first pixel in the upper left corner
+({\it e.g.}, the Molecular Dynamics and Leica confocal formats) this flips the
+image right.
+This is equivalent to
+{\bf rawtopgm\ [file]\ $|$\ pnmflip\ -tb .}
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{BUGS}
+If you don't specify the image width and height, the program will
+try to read the entire image to a memory buffer. If you get a
+message that states that you are out of memory, try to specify the width
+and height on the command line. Also, the -tb option consumes much
+memory.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pgm(5), rawtoppm(1), pnmflip(1)
+\shead{AUTHORS}
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+\nwl
+Modified June 1993 by Oliver Trepte (oliver@fysik4.kth.se).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: rawtopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:01 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: rawtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: rawtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{rawtoppm}{1}{06 February 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX rawtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+rawtoppm - convert raw RGB bytes into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf rawtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -headerskip}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rowskip}
+{\it N}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -rgb}{\rm $|$}{\bf -rbg}{\rm $|$}{\bf -grb}
+{\rm $|$}{\bf -gbr}{\rm $|$}{\bf -brg}{\rm $|$}{\bf -bgr}
+{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -interpixel}{\rm $|$}{\bf -interrow}{\rm ]}
+{\it width height}
+{\rm [}{\it imagedata}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads raw RGB bytes as input.
+%.IX "raw RGB"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+The input file is just RGB bytes.
+You have to specify the width and height on the command line,
+since the program obviously can't get them from the file.
+The maxval is assumed to be 255.
+If the resulting image is upside down, run it through
+{\bf pnmflip\ -tb .}
+%.IX pnmflip
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -headerskip}}
+\item[{{\bf -headerskip}}]
+If the file has a header, you can use this flag to
+skip over it.
+\item[{{\bf -rowskip}}]
+If there is padding at the ends of the rows, you can skip it with this flag.
+\item[{{\bf -rgb -rbg -grb -gbr -brg -bgr}}]
+These flags let you specify alternate color orders.  The default is
+{\bf -rgb}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -interpixel -interrow}}]
+These flags let you specify how the colors are interleaved.
+The default is
+{\bf -interpixel}{\rm ,}
+meaning interleaved by pixel.
+A byte of red, a byte of green, and a byte
+of blue, or whatever color order you specified.
+{\bf -interrow}
+means interleaved by row - a row of red, a row of green, a row of blue,
+assuming standard rgb color order.
+An
+{\bf -interplane}
+flag  - all the red pixels, then all the green, then all the blue - would
+be an obvious extension, but is not implemented.
+You could get the same effect by splitting the file into three parts
+(perhaps using
+{\it dd}{\rm ),}
+turning each part into a PGM file with rawtopgm, and then combining them
+with rgb3toppm.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), rawtopgm(1), rgb3toppm(1), pnmflip(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: rawtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:02 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: rgb3toppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: rgb3toppm.1
+%
+\phead{rgb3toppm}{1}{15 February 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX rgb3toppm
+\shead{NAME}
+rgb3toppm - combine three portable graymaps into one portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf rgb3toppm}
+{\it redpgmfile greenpgmfile bluepgmfile}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads three portable graymaps as input.
+Combines them and produces one portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtorgb3(1), pgmtoppm(1), ppmtopgm(1), ppm(5), pgm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: rgb3toppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:32 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: sirtopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: sirtopnm.1
+%
+\phead{sirtopnm}{1}{20 March 1991}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+sirtopnm - convert a Solitaire file into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf sirtopnm}
+{\rm [}{\it sirfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Solitaire Image Recorder file as input.
+Produces a portable anymap as output.
+The type of the output file depends on the input file - if it's
+an MGI TYPE 17 file, a
+{\it pgm}
+file is written. If it's an MGI TYPE 11 file, a
+{\it ppm}
+file is written.  The program tells you which type it is writing.
+\shead{BUGS}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtosir(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Marvin Landis.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+
+%
+% end of input file: sirtopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:02 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: sldtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: sldtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{sldtoppm}{1}{10 October 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX sldtoppm
+%.IX AutoCAD
+\shead{NAME}
+sldtoppm - convert an AutoCAD slide file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+\raggedright
+{\bf sldtoppm}
+'in 14n
+{\rm [}{\bf -adjust}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -dir}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -height}{\rm $|$}{\bf -ysize}
+{\it s}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -info}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -lib}{\rm $|$}{\bf -Lib}
+{\it name}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -scale}
+{\it s}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -verbose}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\bf -width}{\rm $|$}{\bf -xsize}
+{\it s}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it slidefile}{\rm ]}
+\ind{-7.0em}
+%.ad
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an AutoCAD{l}ide file and outputs a portable pixmap.
+If no
+{\it slidefile}
+is specified, input is read from standard input.
+The ppmdraw library is used to convert the vector and polygon
+information in the slide file to a pixmap; see the file ppmdraw.h for
+details on this package.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -adjust}}
+\item[{{\bf -adjust}}]
+If the display on which the slide file was created had non-square
+pixels, when the slide is processed with
+{\bf sldtoppm}
+and the
+{\bf -adjust}
+option is not present, the following warning will appear:
+\ind{-6.8in}
+Warning - pixels on source screen were non-square.
+\nwl
+Specifying
+{\bf -adjust}
+will correct image width to compensate.
+\ind{-7.0in}
+Specifying the
+{\bf -adjust}
+option causes
+{\bf sldtoppm}
+to scale the width of the image so that pixels in the resulting
+portable pixmap are square (and hence circles appear as true circles,
+not ellipses).  The scaling is performed in the vector domain, before
+scan converting the objects.  The results are, therefore, superior in
+appearance to what you'd obtain were you to perform the equivalent
+scaling with
+{\bf pnmscale}
+after the bitmap had been created.
+\item[{{\bf -dir}}]
+The input is assumed to be an AutoCAD slide library file.  A directory
+listing each slide in the library is printed on standard error.
+\item[{{\bf -height}{\it \ size}
+}]
+Scales the image in the vector domain so it is
+{\it size}
+pixels in height.  If no
+{\bf -width}
+or
+{\bf -xsize}
+option is specified, the width will be adjusted to preserve the
+pixel aspect ratio. 
+\item[{{\bf -info}}]
+Dump the slide file header on standard error, displaying the original
+screen size and aspect ratio among other information.
+\item[{{\bf -lib}{\it \ name}
+}]
+Extracts the slide with the given
+{\it name}
+from the slide library given as input.  The specified
+{\it name}
+is converted to upper case.
+\item[{{\bf -Lib}{\it \ name}
+}]
+Extracts the slide with the given
+{\it name}
+from the slide library given as input.  The
+{\it name}
+is used exactly as specified; it is not converted to upper case.
+\item[{{\bf -scale}{\it \ s}
+}]
+Scales the image by factor
+{\it s}{\rm ,}
+which may be any floating point value greater than zero.  Scaling is
+done after aspect ratio adjustment, if any.  Since scaling is
+performed in the vector domain, before rasterisation, the results look
+much better than running the output of
+{\bf sldtoppm}
+through
+{\bf pnmscale}{\rm .}
+\item[{{\bf -verbose}}]
+Dumps the slide file header and lists every vector and polygon in the
+file on standard error.
+\item[{{\bf -width}{\it \ size}
+}]
+Scales the image in the vector domain so it is
+{\it size}
+pixels wide.  If no
+{\bf -height}
+or
+{\bf -ysize}
+option is specified, the height will be adjusted to preserve the
+pixel aspect ratio. 
+\item[{{\bf -xsize}{\it \ size}
+}]
+Scales the image in the vector domain so it is
+{\it size}
+pixels wide.  If no
+{\bf -height}
+or
+{\bf -ysize}
+option is specified, the height will be adjusted to preserve the
+pixel aspect ratio. 
+\item[{{\bf -ysize}{\it \ size}
+}]
+Scales the image in the vector domain so it is
+{\it size}
+pixels in height.  If no
+{\bf -width}
+or
+{\bf -xsize}
+option is specified, the width will be adjusted to preserve the
+pixel aspect ratio. 
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Only Level 2 slides are converted.  Level 1 format has been obsolete
+since the advent of AutoCAD Release 9 in 1987, and was not portable
+across machine architectures.
+\par
+Slide library items with names containing 8 bit (such as ISO) or 16
+bit (Kanji, for example) characters may not be found when chosen with the
+{\bf -lib}
+option unless
+{\bf sldtoppm}
+has been built with character set conversion functions appropriate to
+the locale.  You can always retrieve slides from libraries regardless
+of the character set by using the
+{\bf -Lib}
+option and specifying the precise name of library member.  Use the
+{\bf -dir}
+option to list the slides in a library if you're unsure of the
+exact name.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+AutoCAD Reference Manual:
+{\it Slide\ File\ Format}{\rm ,}
+{\bf pnmscale}{\rm (1),}
+{\bf ppm}{\rm (5)}
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\ind{1\parindent}{\nofill
+    John Walker
+    Autodesk SA
+    Avenue des Champs-Montants 14b
+    CH-2074 MARIN
+    Suisse/Schweiz/Svizzera/Svizra/Switzerland
+\fill}
+\begin{TPlist}{Usenet:}
+\item[{Usenet:}]
+kelvin@Autodesk.com
+\item[{Fax:}]
+038/33 88 15
+\item[{Voice:}]
+038/33 76 33
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+without any conditions or restrictions.  This software is provided ``as
+is'' without express or implied warranty.
+\par
+AutoCAD and Autodesk are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
+%
+% end of input file: sldtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:03 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: spctoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: spctoppm.1
+%
+\phead{spctoppm}{1}{19 July 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX spctoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+spctoppm - convert an Atari compressed Spectrum file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf spctoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it spcfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Atari compressed Spectrum file as input.
+%.IX Atari
+%.IX Spectrum
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+sputoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Steve Belczyk (seb3@gte.com) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: spctoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:37 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: spottopgm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: spottopgm.1
+%
+\phead{spottopgm}{1L}{}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+spottopgm -- convert SPOT satellite images to Portable Greymap format
+\shead{SYNTAX}
+spottopgm [--1$|$2$|$3] [Firstcol Firstline Lastcol Lastline] inputfile
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf --1$|$2$|$3}}
+\item[{{\bf --1$|$2$|$3}}]
+Extract the given colour from the SPOT image. The colours are infra-red,
+visible light and ultra-violet, although I don't know which corresponds
+to which number. If the image is in colour, this will be announced on
+standard error. The default colour is 1.
+\item[{{\bf Firstcol Firstline Lastcol Lastline}}]
+Extract the specified rectangle from the SPOT image. Most SPOT images are
+3000 lines long and 3000 or more columns wide. Unfortunately the SPOT format
+only gives the width and not the length. The width is printed on standard
+error. The default rectangle is the width of the input image by 3000 lines.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+{\it Spottopgm}
+converts the named
+{\bf inputfile}
+into Portable Greymap format, defaulting to the first color and the whole
+SPOT image unless specified by the options.
+\shead{INSTALLATION}
+You
+{\bf must}
+edit the source program and either define BIGENDIAN or LITTLEENDIAN,
+and fix the typedefs for uint32t, uint16t and uint8t appropriately.
+\shead{BUGS}
+Currently
+{\it spottopgm}
+doesn't determine the length of the input file; this would involve two
+passes over the input file. It defaults to 3000 lines instead.
+\par
+{\it Spottopgm}
+could extract a three-color image (ppm), but I didn't feel like making the
+program more complicated than it is now. Besides, there is no one-to-one
+correspondence between red, green, blue and infra-red, visible and
+ultra-violet.
+\par
+I've only had a limited number of SPOT images to play with, and therefore
+wouldn't guarantee that this will work on any other images.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Warren Toomey  wkt@csadfa.cs.adfa.oz.au
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+The rest of the Pbmplus suite.
+%
+% end of input file: spottopgm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:03 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: sputoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: sputoppm.1
+%
+\phead{sputoppm}{1}{19 July 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX sputoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+sputoppm - convert an Atari uncompressed Spectrum file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf sputoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it spufile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Atari uncompressed Spectrum file as input.
+%.IX Atari
+%.IX Spectrum
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+spctoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Steve Belczyk (seb3@gte.com) and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: sputoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:04 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: tgatoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: tgatoppm.1
+%
+\phead{tgatoppm}{1}{26 August 1989}{}{}
+
+%.IX tgatoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+tgatoppm - convert TrueVision Targa file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf tgatoppm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -debug}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it tgafile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a TrueVision Targa file as input.
+%.IX TrueVision
+%.IX Targa
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -debug}}
+\item[{{\bf -debug}}]
+Causes the header information to be dumped to stderr.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+%.BUGS
+Should really be in PNM, not PPM.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtotga(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Partially based on tga2rast, version 1.0, by Ian J. MacPhedran.
+
+\copyright 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: tgatoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:36 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: tifftopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: tifftopnm.1
+%
+\phead{tifftopnm}{1}{13 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX tifftopnm
+\shead{NAME}
+tifftopnm - convert a TIFF file into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf tifftopnm}
+{\rm [}{\bf -headerdump}{\rm ]}
+{\rm tifffile}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a TIFF file as input.
+%.IX TIFF
+Produces a portable anymap as output.
+The type of the output file depends on the input file - if it's
+black \& white, a
+{\it pbm}
+file is written, else if it's grayscale a
+{\it pgm}
+file, else a
+{\it ppm}
+file.  The program tells you which type it is writing.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -headerdump}}
+\item[{{\bf -headerdump}}]
+Dump TIFF file information to stderr.  This information may be useful 
+in debugging TIFF file conversion problems.  
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\par
+All flags can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtotiff(1), pnm(5)
+\shead{BUGS}
+This program is not self-contained.  To use it you must fetch the
+TIFF Software package listed in the OTHER.SYSTEMS file and configure
+PBMPLUS to use libtiff.  See PBMPLUS's Makefile for details on this
+configuration.
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Derived by Jef Poskanzer from tif2ras.c, which is
+\copyright 1990 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.\hfil\break
+Author: Patrick J. Naughton (naughton@wind.sun.com).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
+% provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
+% both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
+% supporting documentation.
+% 
+% This file is provided AS IS with no warranties of any kind.  The author
+% shall have no liability with respect to the infringement of copyrights,
+% trade secrets or any patents by this file or any part thereof.  In no
+% event will the author be liable for any lost revenue or profits or
+% other special, indirect and consequential damages.
+%
+% end of input file: tifftopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:14 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: xbmtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: xbmtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{xbmtopbm}{1}{31 August 1988}{}{}
+
+%.IX xbmtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+xbmtopbm - convert an X11 or X10 bitmap into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf xbmtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it bitmapfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an X11 or X10 bitmap as input.
+Produces a portable bitmap as output.
+%.IX "X bitmap"
+%.IX "X window system"
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtoxbm(1), pbmtox10bm(1), pbm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1988 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: xbmtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:05 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ximtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ximtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{ximtoppm}{1}{25 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ximtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+ximtoppm - convert an Xim file into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ximtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it ximfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an Xim file as input.
+%.IX Xim
+%.IX "X window system"
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+The Xim toolkit is included in the contrib tree of the X.V11R4 release.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ximtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:05 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: xpmtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: xpmtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{xpmtoppm}{1}{16 August 1990}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+xpmtoppm - convert an X11 pixmap into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf xpmtoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it xpmfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads an X11 pixmap (XPM version 1 or 3) as input.
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{KNOWN BUGS}
+The support to XPM version 3 is limited. Comments can only be single lines
+and there must be for every pixel a default colorname for a color type visual.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtoxpm(1), ppm(5)
+\nwl
+XPM Manual by Arnaud Le Hors (lehors@mirsa.inria.fr).
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+Upgraded to support XPM version 3 by Arnaud Le Hors
+(lehors@mirsa.inria.fr) Tue Apr 9 1991.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: xpmtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Mon Feb  7 08:46:26 1994
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: xvminitoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: xvminitoppm.1
+%
+\phead{xvminitoppm}{1}{14 December 1993}{}{}
+
+\shead{NAME}
+xvminitoppm - convert a XV ``thumbnail'' picture to PPM
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf xvminitoppm}
+{\rm [}{\it xvminipic}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a XV ``thumbnail'' picture (a miniature picture generated by
+the ``VisualSchnauzer'' browser) as input.
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppm(5), xv(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Copyright (C) 1993 by Ingo Wilken
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: xvminitoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:28 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: xwdtopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: xwdtopnm.1
+%
+\phead{xwdtopnm}{1}{11 January 1991}{}{}
+
+%.IX xwdtopnm
+\shead{NAME}
+xwdtopnm - convert a X11 or X10 window dump file into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf xwdtopnm}
+{\rm [}{\it xwdfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a X11 or X10 window dump file as input.
+%.IX XWD
+%.IX "X window system"
+Produces a portable anymap as output.
+The type of the output file depends on the input file - if it's
+black \& white, a
+{\it pbm}
+file is written, else if it's grayscale a
+{\it pgm}
+file, else a
+{\it ppm}
+file.  The program tells you which type it is writing.
+\par
+Using this program, you can convert anything on an X workstation's screen
+into an anymap.
+Just display whatever you're interested in, do an xwd, run it through
+xwdtopnm, and then use pnmcut to select the part you want.
+\shead{BUGS}
+I haven't tested this tool with very many configurations, so there are
+probably bugs.
+Please let me know if you find any.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnmtoxwd(1), pnm(5), xwd(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: xwdtopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:08:14 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: ybmtopbm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: ybmtopbm.1
+%
+\phead{ybmtopbm}{1}{06 March 1990}{}{}
+
+%.IX ybmtopbm
+\shead{NAME}
+ybmtopbm - convert a Bennet Yee ``face'' file into a portable bitmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf ybmtopbm}
+{\rm [}{\it facefile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a file acceptable to the
+{\it face}
+and
+{\it xbm}
+programs by Bennet Yee (bsy+@cs.cmu.edu).
+%.IX face
+Writes a portable bitmap as output.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pbmtoybm(1), pbm(5), face(1), face(5), xbm(1)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: ybmtopbm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:12 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: yuvsplittoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: yuvsplittoppm.1
+%
+\phead{yuvsplittoppm}{1}{26 August 93}{}{}
+
+%.IX yuvsplittoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+yuvplittoppm - convert a Y- an U- and a V-file into a portable pixmap.
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf yuvsplittoppm}
+{\it basename width height}
+[-ccir601]
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads three files, containing the YUV components, as input.
+These files are
+{\it basename}
+Y,
+{\it basename}
+U
+and
+{\it basename}
+.V .
+Produces a portable pixmap on stdout.
+
+Since the YUV files are raw files, the dimensions
+{\it width}
+and
+{\it height}
+must be specified on the command line.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -ccir601}}
+\item[{{\bf -ccir601}}]
+Assumes that the YUV triplets are scaled into the smaller range of the
+CCIR 601 (MPEG) standard. Else, the JFIF (JPEG) standard is assumed.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtoyuvsplit(1), yuvtoppm(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Marcel Wijkstra (wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl), based on {\it ppmtoyuvsplit.}
+%
+% end of input file: yuvsplittoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:06 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: yuvtoppm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: yuvtoppm.1
+%
+\phead{yuvtoppm}{1}{25 March 91}{}{}
+
+%.IX yuvtoppm
+\shead{NAME}
+yuvtoppm - convert Abekas YUV bytes into a portable pixmap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf yuvtoppm}
+{\it width height}
+{\rm [}{\it imagedata}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads raw Abekas YUV bytes as input.
+%.IX Abekas
+Produces a portable pixmap as output.
+The input file is just YUV bytes.
+You have to specify the width and height on the command line,
+since the program obviously can't get them from the file.
+The maxval is assumed to be 255.
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+ppmtoyuv(1), ppm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+Marc Boucher (marc@PostImage.COM),
+based on Example Conversion Program, A60/A64 Digital Video Interface
+Manual, page 69.
+\par
+\copyright 1991 by DHD PostImage Inc.
+\par
+\copyright 1987 by Abekas Video Systems Inc.
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: yuvtoppm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+ 
+% -*-LaTeX-*-
+% Converted automatically from troff to LaTeX
+% by tr2latex ($Revision: 2.2 $$Date: 1992/04/27 15:13:26 $ by C. Engel)
+% on Fri Oct  8 16:09:34 1993
+% tr2latex was written by Kamal Al-Yahya at Stanford University
+% (Kamal%Hanauma@SU-SCORE.ARPA)
+% and substantially enhanced by Christian Engel at RWTH Aachen
+% (krischan@informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
+%
+% troff input file: zeisstopnm.1
+
+\newpage
+%--------------------------------------------------
+% start of input file: zeisstopnm.1
+%
+\phead{zeisstopnm}{1}{15 June 1993}{}{}
+
+%.IX zeisstopnm
+\shead{NAME}
+zeisstopnm - convert a Zeiss confocal file into a portable anymap
+\shead{SYNOPSIS}
+{\bf zeisstopnm}
+{\rm [}{\it -pgm}
+$|$
+{\it -ppm}{\rm ]}
+{\rm [}{\it zeissfile}{\rm ]}
+\shead{DESCRIPTION}
+Reads a Zeiss confocal file as input.
+Produces a portable anymap as output.
+The type of the output file depends on the input file -
+if it's grayscale a
+{\it pgm}
+file, else a
+{\it ppm}
+file will be produced.
+The program tells you which type it is writing.
+\shead{OPTIONS}
+\begin{TPlist}{{\bf -pgm}}
+\item[{{\bf -pgm}}]
+Force the output to be a
+{\it pgm}
+file.
+\item[{{\bf -ppm}}]
+Force the output to be a
+{\it ppm}
+file.
+\end{TPlist}
+
+\shead{SEE ALSO}
+pnm(5)
+\shead{AUTHOR}
+\copyright 1993 by Oliver Trepte (oliver@fysik4.kth.se).
+% Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
+% documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
+% that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+% copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+% documentation.  This software is provided "as is" without express or
+% implied warranty.
+%
+% end of input file: zeisstopnm.1
+%--------------------------------------------------
+\end{document}